Device, method and graphical user interface for navigating between user interfaces and interacting with control objects

Abstract

An electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface is provided.SOLUTION: The device detects a first portion of an input that includes a contact on the touch-sensitive surface, and then detects a second portion of the input that includes movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface. While in motion, the device displays application views, including an application view that corresponds to a user interface of an application and another application view that corresponds to a different user interface of a different application. The device then detects a third portion of the input that includes liftoff of the contact from the touch-sensitive surface. In response, the device displays the application-switcher user interface upon determining that the application-switcher-display criteria are met, and the device displays the home screen user interface including the application launch icon upon determining that the home-display criteria are met.SELECTED DRAWING: None

Description

[Technical Field]

[0001] This application relates generally to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces, including but not limited to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces for navigating through user interfaces and interacting with control objects. [Background technology]

[0002] The use of touch-sensitive surfaces as input devices for computers and other electronic computing devices has grown significantly in recent years. Exemplary touch-sensitive surfaces include touchpads and touchscreen displays. Such surfaces are widely used to manipulate user interfaces on displays and objects therein. Exemplary user interface objects include digital images, video, text, icons, and control elements such as buttons and other graphics.

[0003] Exemplary operations include adjusting the position and / or size of one or more user interface objects, activating a button, or opening a file / application represented by a user interface object, associating metadata with one or more user interface objects, or otherwise manipulating the user interface. Exemplary user interface objects include digital images, video, text, icons, and control elements such as buttons and other graphics. In some situations, a user may need to perform such operations on user interface objects in a file management program (e.g., Finder from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), an image management application (e.g., Aperture, iPhoto, Photos from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a digital content (e.g., video and music) management application (e.g., iTunes® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a drawing application, a presentation application (e.g., Keynote from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a word processing application (e.g., Pages from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), or a spreadsheet application (e.g., Numbers from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California).

[0004] However, methods for performing these operations are cumbersome and inefficient. For example, using a series of mouse-based inputs to select one or more user interface objects and then perform one or more actions on the selected user interface objects is tedious and creates a significant cognitive burden for the user. Additionally, these methods take longer than necessary, thereby wasting energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices. Summary of the Invention

[0005] Thus, there is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for navigating between user interfaces and interacting with control objects. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for navigating between user interfaces and interacting with control objects. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, range, and / or type of inputs from a user, creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.

[0006] The above-mentioned deficiencies and other problems associated with user interfaces for electronic devices having touch-sensitive surfaces are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed devices. In some embodiments, the device is a desktop computer. In some embodiments, the device is portable (e.g., a notebook computer, a tablet computer, or a handheld device). In some embodiments, the device is a personal electronic device (e.g., a wearable electronic device such as a watch). In some embodiments, the device has a touchpad. In some embodiments, the device has a touch-sensitive display (also known as a "touchscreen" or "touchscreen display"). In some embodiments, the device has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory, and one or more modules, programs, or instruction sets stored in the memory for performing multiple functions. In some embodiments, a user interacts with the GUI primarily through stylus and / or finger contacts and gestures on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the functionality optionally includes image editing, drawing, presenting, word processing, spreadsheet creation, game playing, making phone calls, video conferencing, emailing, instant messaging, training support, digital photography, digital videography, web browsing, digital music playback, note taking, and / or digital video playback, and executable instructions to perform those functionality are optionally contained on a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured to be executed by one or more processors.

[0007] According to some embodiments, a method is performed in a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, the method including: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; detecting a first portion of input by the first contact including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface on the display; detecting a second portion of input by the first contact including detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface in a first direction after detecting the first portion of input by the first contact; displaying multiple application views during the first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, the multiple application views including a first application view corresponding to the first user interface of the first application and a second application view corresponding to a second user interface of a second application different from the first application; and detecting lift-off of the first contact from the touch-sensitive surface after detecting the first movement of the first contact while displaying the multiple application views. detecting a third portion of the input by the first contact; and in response to detecting the third portion of the input by the first contact, displaying an application switcher user interface including a representation of a plurality of applications for selectively activating one of the plurality of applications represented in the application switcher user interface in accordance with a determination that the application switcher display criterion, which to be satisfied, requires that the second portion of the input or the first application view satisfy a first movement condition, is satisfied; and displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to the plurality of applications in accordance with a determination that the home display criterion, which to be satisfied requires that the second portion of the input or the first application view satisfy a second movement condition different from the first movement condition, is satisfied.

[0008] According to some embodiments, a method is performed in a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; detecting an input by the first contact while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the first contact at an end of the first movement; in response to detecting the input by the first contact, displaying a second user interface of a second application separate from the first application in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a last application display criterion that, to be satisfied, requires the first movement to satisfy a first directional condition; and displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to a plurality of applications installed on the device in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a home display criterion that, to be satisfied, requires the first movement to satisfy a second directional condition that is separate from the first directional condition.

[0009] According to some embodiments, a method is performed in a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display, detecting an input by the first contact including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the first contact at an end of the first movement, and in response to detecting the input by the first contact, executing a second application separate from the first application in accordance with a determination that the input meets edge swipe criteria and that the first movement meets a first directional condition. displaying a second user interface of the first application; displaying a control panel user interface including a plurality of controls corresponding to functions of a plurality of systems of the device in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies the edge swipe criteria and the first movement satisfies a second directional condition distinct from the first directional condition; refraining from displaying the second user interface of the second application in accordance with a determination that the input does not satisfy the edge swipe criteria; refraining from displaying the control panel user interface; and executing a function within the first application in accordance with the first movement of the first contact.

[0010] According to some embodiments, a method is performed in a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; and, while displaying the first user interface of the first application, detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface that satisfies a navigation gesture criterion, the navigation gesture criterion requiring that the first input include movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface beyond a boundary of a predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface for the navigation gesture criterion to be met; and, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact that satisfies the navigation gesture criterion, ceasing to display the first user interface of the first application and displaying a respective other user interface on the display in accordance with a determination that the first application is not protected; and, in accordance with a determination that the first application is protected, maintaining the display of the first user interface of the first application without displaying the respective other user interface.

[0011] According to some embodiments, a method is performed on a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, the method including: displaying a control panel user interface, the control panel user interface including a first control area, the first control area including a first control for controlling a first function of the device and a second control for controlling a second function of the device; detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a control area enlargement criterion that requires an intensity of the first contact to exceed a first intensity threshold, replacing the display of the first control area with a display of an enlarged first control area, the enlarged first control area including the first control, the second control, and one or more additional controls not included in the first control area; activating a first control for controlling a first function of the device in accordance with a determination that the force satisfies a first control activation criterion that, to be satisfied, requires a first contact to be detected at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to a first control in the first control region and does not require the intensity of the first contact to exceed a first intensity threshold; and activating a second control for controlling a second function of the device in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a second control activation criterion that, to be satisfied, requires the first contact to be detected at a second location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to a second control in the first control region and does not require the intensity of the first contact to exceed a first intensity threshold.

[0012] According to some embodiments, the method is performed in a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface.The method includes: displaying a first user interface on a display; detecting a first input while displaying the first user interface; and in response to detecting the first input, displaying a control panel user interface in a first configuration, the control panel user interface in the first configuration including a first set of control affordances in a first region of the control panel user interface corresponding to respective functions of the device, a first subset of the first set of control affordances being non-user-configurable and a second subset of the first set of control affordances being user-configurable; detecting a second input after displaying the control panel user interface in the first configuration; and in response to detecting the second input, displaying a control panel settings user interface, the control panel settings user interface displaying a representation of the second subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state without displaying the first subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state. detecting one or more configuration inputs while displaying the control panel configuration user interface, including detecting a third input that changes a selection state for a representation of a first control affordance in the second set of control affordances from an unselected state to a selected state; detecting a fourth input after detecting the third input that changes a selection state for the representation of the first control affordance from an unselected state to a selected state; and in response to detecting the fourth input, displaying the control panel user interface in a second configuration that is distinct from the first configuration, the control panel user interface in the second configuration including the first control affordance within the first region of the control panel user interface.

[0013] According to some embodiments, a method is performed in a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, the method including: displaying on the display a first user interface including a slider control, the slider control including an indication of each of a plurality of control values ​​for a control function corresponding to the slider control including a maximum value, a minimum value, and one or more intermediate values ​​between the maximum and minimum values, and an indicator marking a currently selected control value among the plurality of control values; detecting a tactile input while displaying the slider control, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the slider control in the first user interface; and, in response to detecting the tactile input, adjusting the input based on a control adjustment criterion. and toggling a control function corresponding to the slider control if the input satisfies a slider toggle criterion that requires that a contact lift-off with the contact across the touch-sensitive surface less than a threshold amount of movement be detected for the slider toggle criterion to be met.

[0014] According to some embodiments, a method is performed on an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes displaying on the display a first user interface including one or more applications displayed without displaying a dock, detecting a series of one or more inputs while displaying the first user interface, including detecting a movement of a contact from an edge of the device onto the device, and in response to detecting the series of one or more inputs, displaying a dock overlaid on the first user interface without displaying a control panel in accordance with a determination that the series of one or more inputs meets dock display criteria, and displaying the control panel in accordance with a determination that the series of one or more inputs meets control panel display criteria.

[0015] According to some embodiments, a method is performed on an electronic device having a touch-sensitive display, the method including: detecting a first swipe gesture in a respective direction from a first end of the touch-sensitive display; and, in response to detecting the first swipe gesture from the first end of the touch-sensitive display, displaying a plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display in accordance with determining that respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred on a first portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display; and displaying a plurality of recently received notifications in accordance with determining that respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred on a second portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display.

[0016] According to some embodiments, a method is performed on an electronic device having one or more input devices, the method including detecting an input via the one or more input devices and entering a transitional user interface mode in which a plurality of different user interface states are available to be selected based on a comparison of a set of one or more properties of the input to a corresponding set of one or more thresholds while the input continues to be detected via the one or more input devices. While in the transitional user interface mode, the method includes detecting a gesture including a first change in one or more respective properties in the set of one or more properties of the input; and in response to detecting the gesture, selecting a final state for the user interface based on one or more values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in accordance with a determination that the end of the input was detected with a first temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input; and selecting a final state for the user interface based on one or more values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more second values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in accordance with a determination that the end of the input was detected with a second temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input.

[0017] According to some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors that detect intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more tactile output generators, one or more processors, and a memory storing one or more programs, the one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions to perform or cause to be performed any of the operations of the methods described herein. According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium has instructions stored therein that, when executed by an electronic device having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors that detect intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more tactile output generators, cause the device to perform or cause to be performed any of the operations of the methods described herein. According to some embodiments, a graphical user interface on an electronic device having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors that detect the intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more tactile output generators, a memory, and one or more processors executing one or more programs stored in the memory includes one or more of the elements displayed in any of the methods described herein, and the elements are updated in response to input as described in any of the methods described herein. According to some embodiments, the electronic device includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors that detect the intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more tactile output generators, and means for performing or causing to be performed the operations of any of the methods described herein. According to some embodiments, an information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors that detect the intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more tactile output generators includes means for performing or causing to be performed the operations of any of the methods described herein.

[0018] Thus, electronic devices having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors that detect the intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more tactile output generators, optionally one or more device orientation sensors, and optionally an audio system are provided with improved methods and interfaces for navigating through user interfaces and interacting with control objects, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction of such devices. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for navigating through user interfaces and interacting with control objects. [Brief explanation of the drawings]

[0019] For a better understanding of the various embodiments described, reference should be made to the following detailed description in conjunction with the following drawings, in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the drawings, in which:

[0020] [Figure 1A] 1 is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device having a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.

[0021] [Figure 1B] FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling according to some embodiments.

[0022] [Figure 2] 1 illustrates a portable multifunction device with a touch screen according to some embodiments.

[0023] [Figure 3] 1 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. FIG.

[0024] [Figure 4A]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0025] [Figure 4B] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device having a touch-sensitive surface separate from a display in accordance with some embodiments.

[0026] [Figure 4C] 10 illustrates an example of a dynamic intensity threshold, according to some embodiments. [Figure 4D] 10 illustrates an example of a dynamic intensity threshold, according to some embodiments. [Figure 4E] 10 illustrates an example of a dynamic intensity threshold, according to some embodiments.

[0027] [Figure 5A1] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A2] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A3] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A4] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A5] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A6] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A7] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A8]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A9] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A10] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A11] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A12] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A13] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A14] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A15] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A16] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A17] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A18] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A19] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A20] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A21]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A22] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A23] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A24] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A25] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A26] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A27] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A28] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A29] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A30] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A31] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A32] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A33] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A34]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A35] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A36] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A37] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A38] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A39] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A40] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A41] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A42] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A43] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A44] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A45] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A46] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A47]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A48] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A49] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A50] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A51] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A52] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A53] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A54] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A55] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A56] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A57] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A58] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A59] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A60]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A61] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A62] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A63] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A64] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A65] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A66] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A67] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A68] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A69] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A70] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A71] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A72] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A73]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A74] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A75] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A76] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 5A77] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments.

[0028] [Figure 5B1] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B2] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B3] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B4] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B5] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B6] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B7] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B8] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B9] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B10] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B11]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B12] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B13] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B14] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B15] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B16] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B17]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B18] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B19] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B20] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B21] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B22] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B23]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B24] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B25] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B26] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B27] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B28] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B29]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B30] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B31] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B32] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5B33] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or another application) when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments.

[0029] [Figure 5C1] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C2]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C3] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C4] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C5] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C6] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C7] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C8] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C9] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C10] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C11] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C12] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C13] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C14] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C15] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C16] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C17]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C18] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C19] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C20] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C21] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C22] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C23] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C24] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C25] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C26] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C27] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C28] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C29] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C30] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C31] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C32]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C33] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C34] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C35] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C36] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C37] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C38] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C39] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C40] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C41] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C42] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C43] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C44] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5C45] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface and displaying expanded areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments.

[0030] [Figure 5D1] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D2] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D3]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D4] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D5] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D6] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D7] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D8] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D9] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D10] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D11] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D12] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D13] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D14] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D15]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D16] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D17] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D18] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D19] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D20] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D21] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D22] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D23] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D24] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D25] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D26] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D27]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D28] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D29] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D30] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D31] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D32] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D33] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D34] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D35] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D36] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D37] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D38] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D39]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D40] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D41] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5D42] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments.

[0031] [Figure 5E1] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E2] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E3] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E4] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E5] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E6] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E7] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E8] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E9] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E10] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E11] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E12] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E13]10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E14] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E15] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E16] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E17] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E18] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E19] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E20]10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E21] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E22] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E23] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E24] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E25] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E26] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E27]10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E28] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E29] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E30] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E31] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E32] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E33] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E34]10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E35] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E36] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E37] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E38] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5E39] 10A-10C show an exemplary user interface for displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and for changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments.

[0032] [Figure 5F1] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F2] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F3] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F4] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F5] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F6] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F7] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F8] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F9] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F10] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F11] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F12] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F13]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F14] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F15] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F16] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F17] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F18] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F19] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F20] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F21] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F22] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F23]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F24] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F25] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F26] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F27] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F28] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F29] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F30] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F31] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F32] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F33]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F34] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F35] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F36] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F37] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F38] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F39] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F40] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F41] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F42] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F43]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F44] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 5F45] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments.

[0033] [Figure 5G1] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G2] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G3] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G4] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G5] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G6] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G7] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G8]1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G9] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G10] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G11] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G12] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G13] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G14] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G15] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G16] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 5G17] 1 illustrates an exemplary user interface for navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments.

[0034] [Figure 6A]1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 6B] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 6C] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 6D] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 6E] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 6F] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 6G] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 6H] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 6I] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 6J] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 6K] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 6L] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments.

[0035] [Figure 7A] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating to a home screen user interface or a recently opened application in response to a navigation gesture according to some embodiments. [Figure 7B] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating to a home screen user interface or a recently opened application in response to a navigation gesture according to some embodiments. [Figure 7C] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating to a home screen user interface or a recently opened application in response to a navigation gesture according to some embodiments. [Figure 7D] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating to a home screen user interface or a recently opened application in response to a navigation gesture according to some embodiments. [Figure 7E]1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating to a home screen user interface or a recently opened application in response to a navigation gesture according to some embodiments. [Figure 7F] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating to a home screen user interface or a recently opened application in response to a navigation gesture according to some embodiments.

[0036] [Figure 8A] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating to a control panel user interface or a recently opened application in response to a navigation gesture according to some embodiments. [Figure 8B] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating to a control panel user interface or a recently opened application in response to a navigation gesture according to some embodiments. [Figure 8C] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating to a control panel user interface or a recently opened application in response to a navigation gesture according to some embodiments. [Figure 8D] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating to a control panel user interface or a recently opened application in response to a navigation gesture according to some embodiments. [Figure 8E] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating to a control panel user interface or a recently opened application in response to a navigation gesture according to some embodiments.

[0037] [Figure 9A] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for restricting manipulation of navigation gestures according to some embodiments. [Figure 9B] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for restricting manipulation of navigation gestures according to some embodiments. [Figure 9C]1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for restricting manipulation of navigation gestures according to some embodiments. [Figure 9D] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for restricting manipulation of navigation gestures according to some embodiments.

[0038] [Figure 10A] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments. [Figure 10B] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between user interfaces according to some embodiments.

[0039] [Figure 11A] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a control panel user interface and displaying enlarged areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 11B] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a control panel user interface and displaying enlarged areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 11C] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a control panel user interface and displaying enlarged areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 11D] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a control panel user interface and displaying enlarged areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. [Figure 11E] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a control panel user interface and displaying enlarged areas of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments.

[0040] [Figure 12A] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 12B] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 12C] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 12D] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 12E] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 12F] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 12G] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 12H] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 12I] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for viewing and editing a control panel user interface according to some embodiments.

[0041] [Figure 13A] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 13B] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 13C] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments. [Figure 13D] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a control panel user interface with a slider control and changing the slider position or toggling the control function in response to different inputs on the slider control, according to some embodiments.

[0042] [Figure 14A] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14B] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14C] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14D] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14E] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock, according to some embodiments.

[0043] [Figure 15A] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 15B] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 15C]10 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating to a control panel user interface from a different user interface according to some embodiments.

[0044] [Figure 16A] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 16B] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 16C] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 16D] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method of navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments.

[0045] [Figure 17A] 1 illustrates static and dynamic speed and positional boundaries for navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 17B] 1 illustrates static and dynamic speed and positional boundaries for navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments. [Figure 17C]1 illustrates static and dynamic speed and positional boundaries for navigating between an application user interface, an application switcher user interface, and a home screen user interface according to some embodiments.

[0046] [Figure 18A] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating between user interfaces using one or more dynamic thresholds according to some embodiments. [Figure 18B] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating between user interfaces using one or more dynamic thresholds according to some embodiments. [Figure 18C] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating between user interfaces using one or more dynamic thresholds according to some embodiments. [Figure 18D] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating between user interfaces using one or more dynamic thresholds according to some embodiments. [Figure 18E] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating between user interfaces using one or more dynamic thresholds according to some embodiments. [Figure 18F] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating between user interfaces using one or more dynamic thresholds according to some embodiments. [Figure 18G] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for navigating between user interfaces using one or more dynamic thresholds according to some embodiments. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

[0047] Conventional methods of navigating between user interfaces, particularly between application user interfaces and system user interfaces (e.g., home screen user interface, application switcher user interface, control panel user interface), often require multiple, separate inputs (e.g., gestures and button presses) and irreversible, separate user interface transitions. The following embodiments provide a single, dynamically adjustable gesture that triggers navigation to different user interfaces (e.g., recently opened applications, home screen user interface, application switcher user interface, control panel user interface) based on different criteria (e.g., different criteria based on contact and / or position, timing, movement parameters of displayed user interface objects). Additionally, the following embodiments provide a customizable control panel user interface with control objects that include enlarged views with expanded control functionality, and depending on detected user interaction, the control responds differently, for example, to toggle the control functionality, convert to a slider control, or expand into an enlarged control panel. Additionally, the following embodiments provide methods for displaying a dock or a control panel instead of or in addition to a dock.

[0048] 1A-1B, 2, and 3 provide descriptions of exemplary devices. Figures 4A-4B, 5A1-5A77, 5B1-5B33, 5C1-5C45, 5D1-5D42, 5E1-5E39, 5F1-5F45, and 5G1-5G17 show exemplary user interfaces for navigating between user interfaces, interacting with control objects, and displaying docks or control panels, according to some embodiments. Figures 17A-17C show examples of position and velocity thresholds, according to some embodiments. 6A-6L, 7A-7F, 8A-8E, 9A-9D, 10A-10B, 11A-11E, 12A-12I, 13A-13D, 14A-14E, 15A-15C, 16A-16D, and 18A-18G are flowcharts of methods for navigating between user interfaces, interacting with control objects, and displaying docks or control panels according to some embodiments. The user interfaces in Figures 4A-4B, 5A1-5A77, 5B1-5B33, 5C1-5C45, 5D1-5D42, 5E1-5E39, 5F1-5F45, and 5G1-5G17, and the position and velocity thresholds in Figures 17A-17C are used to illustrate the processing in Figures 6A-6L, 7A-7F, 8A-8E, 9A-9D, 10A-10B, 11A-11E, 12A-12I, 13A-13D, 14A-14E, 15A-15C, 16A-16D, and 18A-18G. Exemplary Devices

[0049] Reference will now be made in detail to the embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. In the following detailed description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the various embodiments being described. However, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the various embodiments being described may optionally be practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, components, circuits, and networks have not been described in detail so as not to unnecessarily obscure aspects of the embodiments.

[0050] In this specification, terms such as "first," "second," etc. are used in some instances to describe various elements, but it will be understood that these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are used only to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first contact may be referred to as a second contact, and similarly, a second contact may be referred to as a first contact, without departing from the scope of the various embodiments described. Although a first contact and a second contact are both contacts, they are not the same contact unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.

[0051] The terminology used in the description of the various embodiments set forth herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various embodiments set forth and in the appended claims, the singular forms "a," "an," and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. As used herein, the term "and / or" should also be understood to refer to and include any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms "includes," "including," "comprises," and / or "comprising," as used herein, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and / or components, but do not exclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and / or groups thereof.

[0052] As used herein, the term "if" is optionally interpreted to mean "when," "upon," "in response to determining," or "in response to detecting," depending on the context. Similarly, the phrases "if it is determined" or "if (a stated condition or event) is detected" are optionally interpreted to mean "upon determining," "in response to determining," "upon detecting (the stated condition or event)," or "in response to detecting (the stated condition or event)," depending on the context.

[0053] Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communication device, such as a mobile telephone, that also includes other functions, such as PDA and / or music player functions. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, but are not limited to, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablet computers having a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchscreen display and / or touchpad), are optionally used. It should also be understood that in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communication device, but rather a desktop computer having a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchscreen display and / or touchpad).

[0054] In the following discussion, electronic devices are described that include a display and a touch-sensitive surface. However, it should be understood that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse, and / or a joystick.

[0055] The device typically supports a variety of applications such as one or more of a note-taking application, a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disc authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephony application, a video conferencing application, an email application, an instant messaging application, a training support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and / or a digital video player application.

[0056] Various applications running on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as a touch-sensitive surface. One or more features of the touch-sensitive surface and corresponding information displayed on the device are optionally adjusted and / or changed from one application to the next and / or within each application. In this way, the common physical architecture of the device (such as the touch-sensitive surface) optionally supports various applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.

[0057] Attention now turns to embodiments of portable devices with touch-sensitive displays. FIG. 1A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system 112, according to some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system 112 may conveniently be referred to as a "touch screen" or simply a touch-sensitive display. Device 100 includes memory 102 (optionally including one or more computer-readable storage media), memory controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, peripherals interface 118, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, input / output (I / O) subsystem 106, other input or control devices 116, and external port 124. Device 100 optionally includes one or more light sensors 164. Device 100 optionally includes one or more intensity sensors 165 for detecting the intensity of a contact on device 100 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100). Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile output on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile output on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touchpad 355 of device 300), these components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 103.

[0058] As used herein and in the claims, the term “tactile output” refers to a physical displacement of a device relative to its previous position, a physical displacement of a component of the device (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) relative to another component of the device (e.g., a housing), or a displacement of a component relative to the center of gravity of the device, detected by a user with the user's sense of touch. For example, in a situation where a device or a component of the device is in contact with a touch-sensitive surface of a user (e.g., the fingers, palm, or other part of the user's hand), the tactile output produced by the physical displacement is interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in a physical property of the device or a component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is optionally interpreted by the user as a “downclick” or “upclick” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as a “downclick” or “upclick” even when no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user's movement. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is optionally interpreted or perceived by a user as "roughness" of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in the smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such user interpretation of touch depends on the user's personal sensory perception, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to the majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., "upclick," "downclick," "roughness"), unless otherwise specified, the generated tactile output corresponds to a physical displacement of the device or a component of the device that produces the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.The use of tactile output to provide haptic feedback to the user enhances the usability of the device, makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by assisting the user in providing appropriate inputs when operating / interacting with the device and reducing user errors), and additionally reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by allowing the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

[0059] In some embodiments, the tactile output pattern specifies characteristics of the tactile output, such as the amplitude of the tactile output, the shape of the moving waveform of the tactile output, the frequency of the tactile output, and / or the duration of the tactile output.

[0060] When tactile outputs having different tactile output patterns are generated by a device (e.g., via one or more tactile output generators that move a movable mass to generate the tactile output), the tactile outputs, in some circumstances, cause different tactile sensations when a user holds or touches the device. While a user's sensations are based on their perception of the tactile output, most users are able to distinguish changes in the waveform, frequency, and amplitude generated by the device. Thus, the waveform, frequency, and amplitude can be adjusted to indicate to the user that different operations have been performed. In this manner, tactile outputs having tactile output patterns designed, selected, and / or engineered to simulate the properties (e.g., size, material, weight, stiffness, smoothness, etc.), behaviors (e.g., vibration, displacement, acceleration, rotation, magnification, etc.), and / or interactions (e.g., collision, adhesion, repulsion, attraction, friction, etc.) of objects in a given environment (e.g., a user interface including graphical features and objects, a simulated physical environment having virtual boundaries and virtual objects, a real physical environment having physical boundaries and physical objects, and / or any combination of the above) can, in some circumstances, provide a user with useful feedback that reduces input errors and increases efficiency in the user's operation of a device. Additionally, tactile outputs are optionally generated to correspond to feedback unrelated to simulated physical properties, such as input thresholds or object selection. Such tactile outputs can, in some circumstances, provide a user with useful feedback that reduces input errors and increases efficiency in the user's operation of a device.

[0061] In some embodiments, a tactile output having an appropriate tactile output pattern serves as a cue to the occurrence of an event of interest behind the scenes within a user interface or device. Examples of events of interest include activation of an affordance (e.g., a real button, a virtual button, or a toggle switch) provided on the device or within the user interface, the success or failure of a requested operation, reaching or crossing a boundary within the user interface, entering a new state, switching input focus between objects, activating a new mode, reaching or crossing an input threshold, detection or recognition of a type of input or gesture, etc. In some embodiments, a tactile output is provided to serve as a warning or alert to an impending event or outcome that will occur unless a redirection or interrupting input is detected in a timely manner. Tactile output is also used in other contexts to enhance the user experience, improve device accessibility to users with visual or motor impairments or other accessibility needs, and / or improve the efficiency and functionality of the user interface and / or device. The tactile output is optionally accompanied by an audio output and / or a visible user interface change, which further enhances the user's experience when interacting with the user interface and / or device, further facilitates conveying information about the state of the user interface and / or device, and reduces input errors and increases efficiency in the user's operation of the device.

[0062] It should be understood that device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has more or fewer components than those shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of components. The various components shown in FIG. 1A are implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof, including one or more signal processing circuits and / or application specific integrated circuits.

[0063] Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory, and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Access to memory 102 by other components of device 100, such as CPU(s) 120 and peripherals interface 118, is optionally controlled by memory controller 122.

[0064] The peripherals interface 118 may be used to couple the device's input and output peripherals with the CPU(s) 120 and memory 102. The one or more processors 120 operate or execute various software programs and / or instruction sets stored in the memory 102 to perform various functions and process data for the device 100.

[0065] In some embodiments, peripheral interface 118, CPU(s) 120, and memory controller 122 are optionally implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104. In some other embodiments, they are optionally implemented on separate chips.

[0066] The RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 transmits and receives RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. The RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to electromagnetic signals or electromagnetic signals to electrical signals and communicates with communication networks and other communication devices via electromagnetic signals. The RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including, but not limited to, an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, etc. The RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates wirelessly with other devices and with networks, such as the Internet, also known as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet, and / or wireless networks, such as cellular telephone networks, wireless local area networks (LANs), and / or metropolitan area networks (MANs).The wireless communication optionally includes a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), High Speed ​​Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA), High Speed ​​Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual Cell HSPA (DC-HSPA), Long Term Evolution (LTE), Near Field Communication (NFC), Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (W-CDMA), Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11ac, IEEE 802.11ax, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, and / or IEEE 802.11n), Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, protocols for email (e.g., Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) and / or Post Office Protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and / or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document.

[0067] Audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, and microphone 113 provide an audio interface between a user and device 100. Audio circuitry 110 receives audio data from peripherals interface 118, converts the audio data into electrical signals, and transmits the electrical signals to speaker 111. Speaker 111 converts the electrical signals into sound waves audible to humans. Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted from sound waves by microphone 113. Audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signals into audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is optionally retrieved from and / or transmitted to memory 102 and / or RF circuitry 108 by peripherals interface 118. In some embodiments, audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212, FIG. 2 ). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and a removable audio input / output peripheral, such as an output-only headphone or a headset with both an output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and an input (e.g., a microphone).

[0068] I / O subsystem 106 couples input / output peripherals on device 100, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 and other input or control devices 116, with peripheral interface 118. I / O subsystem 106 optionally includes one or more input controllers 160 for display controller 156, light sensor controller 158, intensity sensor controller 159, haptic feedback controller 161, and other input or control devices. One or more input controllers 160 receive electrical signals from and send electrical signals to other input or control devices 116. Other input or control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, etc. In some alternative embodiments, input controller(s) 160 are optionally coupled to any (or none) of a keyboard, infrared port, USB port, stylus, and / or pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 208, FIG. 2) optionally include up / down buttons for volume control of the speaker 111 and / or microphone 113. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 206, FIG. 2).

[0069] Touch-sensitive display system 112 provides an input and output interface between the device and a user. Display controller 156 receives electrical signals from and / or sends electrical signals to touch-sensitive display system 112. Touch-sensitive display system 112 displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively referred to as "graphics"). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output corresponds to user interface objects. As used herein, the term "affordance" refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object (e.g., a graphical user interface object configured to respond to input directed towards the graphical user interface object). Examples of user-interactive graphical user interface objects include, but are not limited to, a button, a slider, an icon, a selectable menu item, a switch, a hyperlink, or other user interface control.

[0070] Touch-sensitive display system 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from a user based on haptic and / or tactile contact. Touch-sensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and / or instruction sets in memory 102) detect contacts (and any movement or disruption of contact) on touch-sensitive display system 112 and translate the detected contacts into interactions with user interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112. In some embodiments, the point of contact between touch-sensitive display system 112 and the user corresponds to the user's finger or stylus.

[0071] Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally uses liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting polymer display (LPD), or light emitting diode (LED) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 optionally detect contact and any movement or disruption thereof using any of a number of now-known or later-developed touch sensing technologies, including, but not limited to, capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch-sensitive display system 112. In some embodiments, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.

[0072] Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally has a video resolution greater than 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touchscreen video resolution exceeds 400 dpi (e.g., 500 dpi, 800 dpi, or higher). A user optionally contacts touch-sensitive display system 112 using any suitable object or accessory, such as a stylus, finger, or the like. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work with finger-based contacts and gestures, which may be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of ​​finger contact on the touchscreen. In some embodiments, the device translates coarse finger-based input into precise pointer / cursor position or commands to perform the user's desired action.

[0073] In some embodiments, in addition to the touchscreen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating certain functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of ​​the device that, unlike the touchscreen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is optionally a touch-sensitive surface separate from touch-sensitive display system 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touchscreen.

[0074] Device 100 also includes a power system 162 for providing power to the various components. Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, power failure detection circuitry, power converters or inverters, power status indicators (e.g., light emitting diodes (LEDs)), and any other components associated with generating, managing, and distributing electrical power within a portable device.

[0075] Device 100 also optionally includes one or more light sensors 164. FIG. 1A shows a light sensor coupled to light sensor controller 158 in I / O subsystem 106. Light sensor(s) 164 optionally include a charge-coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. Light sensor(s) 164 receive light from the environment, projected through one or more lenses, and convert the light into data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143 (also referred to as a camera module), light sensor(s) 164 optionally capture still images and / or video. In some embodiments, the light sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch-sensitive display system 112 on the front of the device, so that the touchscreen can be used as a viewfinder for still and / or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, another light sensor is located on the front of the device so that an image of the user is captured (e.g., for a selfie, for a video conference while the user is viewing other video conference participants on the touchscreen, etc.).

[0076] Device 100 also optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165. FIG. 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller 159 in I / O subsystem 106. Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 optionally include one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 receive contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is juxtaposed with or proximate to the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touchscreen display system 112, which is located on the front of device 100.

[0077] Device 100 also optionally includes one or more proximity sensors 166. Figure 1A shows proximity sensor 166 coupled to peripherals interface 118. Alternatively, proximity sensor 166 is coupled to input controller 160 in I / O subsystem 106. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch-sensitive display system 112 when the multifunction device is placed near a user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).

[0078] Device 100 also optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167. FIG. 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller 161 in I / O subsystem 106. In some embodiments, tactile output generator(s) 167 include one or more electroacoustic devices, such as speakers or other audio components, and / or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear movement, such as motors, solenoids, electroactive polymers, piezoelectric actuators, electrostatic actuators, or other tactile output generating components (e.g., components that convert electrical signals into tactile output on the device). Tactile output generator(s) 167 receive tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 133 and generate tactile outputs on device 100 that can be sensed by a user of device 100. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is juxtaposed to or proximate to a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112) and optionally generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in / out of the face of device 100) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as the face of device 100). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch-sensitive display system 112, which is located on the front of device 100.

[0079] Device 100 also optionally includes one or more accelerometers 168. FIG. 1A shows accelerometer 168 coupled to peripherals interface 118. Alternatively, accelerometer 168 is optionally coupled to input controller 160 in I / O subsystem 106. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touchscreen display in a portrait or landscape view based on analysis of data received from one or more accelerometers. In addition to accelerometer(s) 168, device 100 optionally includes a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information regarding the position and orientation (e.g., vertically or horizontally) of device 100.

[0080] In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 102 include an operating system 126, a communications module (or instruction set) 128, a touch / motion module (or instruction set) 130, a graphics module (or instruction set) 132, a haptic feedback module (or instruction set) 133, a text input module (or instruction set) 134, a Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or instruction set) 135, and applications (or instruction sets) 136. Additionally, in some embodiments, as shown in Figures 1A and 3, memory 102 stores device / global internal state 157. Device / global internal state 157 includes one or more of: active application state, which indicates which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, which indicates which applications, views, or other information occupy various areas of touch-sensitive display system 112; sensor state, which includes information obtained from the device's various sensors and other input or control devices 116; and position and / or location information regarding the device's position and / or orientation.

[0081] Operating system 126 (e.g., an embedded operating system such as iOS, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX®, UNIX®, OS X, WINDOWS®, or VxWorks) includes various software components and / or drivers for controlling and managing overall system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitating communication between various hardware and software components.

[0082] Communications module 128 facilitates communication with other devices through one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for processing data received by RF circuitry 108 and / or external port 124. External port 124 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE®, etc.) is adapted to couple to other devices directly or indirectly through a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector identical to, similar to, and / or compatible with the 30-pin connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. In some embodiments, the external port is a Lightning connector identical to, similar to, and / or compatible with the Lightning connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.

[0083] Contact / motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch-sensitive display system 112 (in cooperation with display controller 156) and with other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact / motion module 130 includes software components for performing various operations related to detecting contact (e.g., by a finger or stylus), such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining the intensity of the contact (e.g., contact force or pressure, or a surrogate for contact force or pressure), determining if there is contact movement and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger drag events), and determining if the contact has stopped (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or an interruption of contact). Contact / motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining the movement of the contact point represented by the set of contact data optionally includes determining the speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and / or acceleration (change in magnitude and / or direction) of the contact point. The actions are optionally applied to a single contact (e.g., a single finger contact or a stylus contact) or multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., "multi-touch" / multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact / motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contacts on a touchpad.

[0084] Contact / motion module 130 optionally detects gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different movements, timing, and / or strength of the detected contact). Thus, gestures are optionally detected by detecting particular contact patterns. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger down event, followed by a finger lift (lift-off) event at the same location (or substantially the same location) as the finger down event (e.g., at the location of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger down event, followed by one or more finger drag events, followed by a finger lift (lift-off) event. Similarly, taps, swipes, drags, and other gestures are optionally detected with respect to a stylus by detecting particular contact patterns with respect to the stylus.

[0085] In some embodiments, detecting a finger tap gesture depends on the length of time between detecting a finger-down event and detecting a finger-up event, but is not related to the intensity of the finger contact between detecting the finger-down event and detecting the finger-up event. In some embodiments, a tap gesture is detected according to determining that the length of time between the finger-down event and the finger-up event is less than a predetermined value (e.g., less than 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, or 0.5 seconds), regardless of whether the intensity of the finger contact during the tap meets a given intensity threshold (greater than a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold), such as a light or deep pressure intensity threshold. Thus, a finger tap gesture can satisfy certain input criteria that do not require the characteristic intensity of the contact to meet a given intensity threshold for the particular input criteria to be met. For clarity, the finger contact in a tap gesture generally needs to meet a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which the contact is not detected for a finger-down event to be detected. A similar analysis applies to detecting tap gestures or other contacts with a stylus. In cases where the device is capable of detecting contact of a finger or stylus hovering over the touch-sensitive surface, the nominal contact-detection intensity threshold is optional and does not correspond to physical contact between the finger or stylus and the touch-sensitive surface.

[0086] In a similar manner, the same concepts apply to other types of gestures. For example, swipe gestures, pinch gestures, de-pinch gestures, and / or long press gestures are optionally detected based on meeting criteria that are either unrelated to the intensity of the contacts included in the gesture or that do not require the contacts performing the gesture to reach an intensity threshold in order to be recognized. For example, a swipe gesture is detected based on the amount of movement of one or more contacts, a pinch gesture is detected based on the movement of two or more contacts toward each other, a de-pinch gesture is detected based on the movement of two or more contacts away from each other, and a long press gesture is detected based on the duration of contact on the touch-sensitive surface that is less than a threshold amount of movement. Thus, a statement that a particular gesture recognition criterion does not require the intensity of a contact(s) to meet a respective intensity threshold in order for the particular gesture recognition criterion to be met means that the particular gesture recognition criterion can be met when the contact(s) in the gesture do not reach their respective intensity threshold, and can also be met in situations where one or more of the contacts in the gesture do not reach or exceed their respective intensity threshold. In some embodiments, a tap gesture is detected based on a determination that a finger-down event and a finger-up event are detected within a predefined time period, regardless of whether the contacts are above or below their respective intensity thresholds during the predefined time period, and a swipe gesture is detected based on a determination that a movement of the contact is greater than a predefined magnitude, even if the contact exceeds its respective intensity threshold at the end of the movement of the contact. Even in implementations in which gesture detection is affected by the intensity of the contact performing the gesture (e.g., the device detects long presses more quickly when the intensity of the contact exceeds an intensity threshold, or the device is slow to detect tap inputs when the intensity of the contact is higher), detection of those gestures does not require the contact to reach a particular intensity threshold, as long as the criteria for recognizing the gesture can be met in situations in which the contact does not reach the particular intensity threshold (e.g., even if the amount of time required to recognize the gesture varies).

[0087] The contact intensity threshold, duration threshold, and movement threshold may, in some circumstances, be combined in various different combinations to create heuristics for distinguishing between two or more different gestures directed at the same input element or region, thereby enabling multiple different interactions with the same input element to provide a richer set of user interactions and responses. A statement that a particular set of gesture recognition criteria does not require that the intensity of a contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold for that particular gesture recognition criterion to be satisfied does not preclude the simultaneous evaluation of other intensity-dependent gesture recognition criteria to identify other gestures with criteria that are satisfied when the gesture includes a contact having an intensity above a respective intensity threshold. For example, in some circumstances, a first gesture recognition criterion for a first gesture that does not require that the intensity of a contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold for that first gesture recognition criterion to be satisfied competes with a second gesture recognition criterion for a second gesture that depends on the contact(s) reaching a respective intensity threshold. In such a competition, a gesture is optionally not recognized as satisfying the first gesture recognition criteria for the first gesture if the second gesture recognition criteria for the second gesture are satisfied first. For example, if the contact reaches the respective intensity threshold before moving the predefined amount of movement, a deep press gesture is detected rather than a swipe gesture. Conversely, if the contact moves the predefined amount of movement before reaching the respective intensity threshold, a swipe gesture is detected rather than a deep press gesture. Even in such a situation, the first gesture recognition criteria for the first gesture still do not require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet the respective intensity threshold for the first gesture recognition criteria to be satisfied, because if the contact remains below the respective intensity threshold until the end of the gesture (e.g., a swipe gesture with a contact that does not increase in intensity above the respective intensity threshold), the gesture is recognized by the first gesture recognition criteria as a swipe gesture.In this way, certain gesture recognition criteria that do not require the intensity of the contact(s) to meet a respective intensity threshold for the particular gesture recognition criterion to be satisfied still depend on the intensity of the contact with respect to the intensity threshold, in the sense that (A) in some circumstances, they ignore the intensity of the contact with respect to the intensity threshold (e.g., for a tap gesture), and / or (B) in some circumstances, the particular gesture recognition criterion (e.g., for a long press gesture) will not function if a competing set of intensity-dependent gesture recognition criteria (e.g., for a deep press gesture) recognizes an input as corresponding to an intensity-dependent gesture before the particular gesture recognition criterion recognizes the gesture corresponding to the input (e.g., for a long press gesture competing with a deep press gesture for recognition).

[0088] Graphics module 132 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch-sensitive display system 112 or other display, including components for modifying the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual characteristics) of the displayed graphics. As used herein, the term "graphics" includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including, but not limited to, text, web pages, icons (such as user interface objects including soft keys), digital images, video, animation, etc.

[0089] In some embodiments, graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is optionally assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives one or more codes specifying the graphics to be displayed, along with coordinate data and other graphic characteristic data, as needed, from an application or the like, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 156.

[0090] The haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions (e.g., instructions used by the haptic feedback controller 161) that use the tactile output generator(s) 167 to create tactile outputs at one or more locations on the device 100 in response to user interaction with the device 100.

[0091] A text input module 134, optionally a component of the graphics module 132, provides a soft keyboard for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 137, email 140, IM 141, browser 147, and any other application requiring text input).

[0092] The GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to the phone 138 for use in location-based dialing, to the camera 143 as picture / video metadata, and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow pages widgets, and map / navigation widgets).

[0093] The application 136 optionally includes the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof: • a contacts module 137 (sometimes called an address book or contact list); ●Telephone module 138, ●Video conferencing module 139, ● an email client module 140; ● Instant messaging (IM) module 141; ●Training support module 142, a camera module 143 for still and / or video images, ● Image management module 144; ● Browser module 147, ● Calendar module 148, • a widget module 149 optionally including one or more of a weather widget 149-1, a stocks widget 149-2, a calculator widget 149-3, an alarm clock widget 149-4, a dictionary widget 149-5, and other widgets acquired by the user, as well as user-created widgets 149-6; a widget creation module 150 for creating user-created widgets 149-6; ● Search module 151, • a video and music player module 152, optionally consisting of a video player module and a music player module; ● Memo module 153, Map module 154, and / or ●Online video module 155.

[0094] Examples of other applications 136 that are optionally stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, Java-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice duplication.

[0095] In cooperation with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, contacts module 137 includes executable instructions (e.g., stored in memory 102 or in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 370) for managing an address book or contact list, including adding name(s) to an address book, deleting name(s) from an address book, associating phone number(s), email address(es), postal address(es), or other information with a name, associating images with a name, categorizing and sorting names, providing phone numbers and / or email addresses to initiate and / or facilitate communication by phone 138, video conference 139, email 140, or IM 141, and the like.

[0096] In cooperation with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, telephone module 138 includes executable instructions for entering a series of characters corresponding to a telephone number, accessing one or more telephone numbers in address book 137, modifying an entered telephone number, dialing each telephone number, conducting a conversation, and disconnecting or hanging up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, wireless communication optionally uses any of a number of communication standards, protocols, and technologies.

[0097] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, light sensor(s) 164, light sensor controller 158, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, contact list 137, and telephone module 138, video conferencing module 139 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants according to the user's instructions.

[0098] In cooperation with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, email client module 140 contains executable instructions for creating, sending, receiving, and managing emails in response to user instructions. In cooperation with image management module 144, email client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send emails with still or video images captured by camera module 143.

[0099] In cooperation with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, instant message module 141 includes executable instructions for entering a series of characters corresponding to an instant message, modifying previously entered characters, sending each instant message (e.g., using Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocols for telephone-based instant messaging, or using XMPP, SIMPLE, Apple Push Notification Service (APNs), or IMPS for Internet-based instant messaging), receiving instant messages, and viewing received instant messages. In some embodiments, sent and / or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files, and / or other attachments, such as those supported by MMS and / or Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, "instant message" refers to both telephone-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, APNs, or IMPS).

[0100] In cooperation with the RF circuitry 108, the touch-sensitive display system 112, the display controller 156, the contact module 130, the graphics module 132, the text input module 134, the GPS module 135, the map module 154, and the music player module 152, the training support module 142 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and / or calorie burn goals), communicate with training sensors (in the sports device and the smartwatch), receive training sensor data, calibrate sensors used to monitor workouts, select and play music for workouts, and display, store, and transmit workout data.

[0101] In cooperation with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, light sensor(s) 164, light sensor controller 158, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and image management module 144, camera module 143 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including video streams), store them in memory 102, modify characteristics of the still images or video, and / or delete the still images or video from memory 102.

[0102] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and camera module 143, image management module 144 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and / or store still and / or video images.

[0103] In cooperation with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, browser module 147 contains executable instructions for browsing the Internet in accordance with a user's instructions, including retrieving, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.

[0104] In cooperation with RF path 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, email client module 140, and browser module 147, calendar module 148 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) according to user instructions.

[0105] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget module 149 is a mini-application (e.g., weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5) that is optionally downloaded and used by a user, or a mini-application (e.g., user-created widget 149-6) created by a user. In some embodiments, a widget includes a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file, a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an Extensible Markup Language (XML) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).

[0106] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget creation module 150 contains executable instructions for creating widgets (e.g., turning user-specified portions of a web page into widgets).

[0107] In cooperation with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, search module 151 includes executable instructions to search memory 102 for text, music, sound, images, video, and / or other files that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.

[0108] In cooperation with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, and browser module 147, video and music player module 152 contains executable instructions that enable a user to download and play recorded music or other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, as well as executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play videos (e.g., on touch-sensitive display system 112 or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124). In some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (a trademark of Apple Inc.).

[0109] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, notes module 153 contains executable instructions for creating and managing notes, to-do lists, and the like, in accordance with user instructions.

[0110] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, and browser module 147, map module 154 includes executable instructions to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions, data about businesses and other points of interest at or near a particular location, and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.

[0111] In cooperation with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, text input module 134, email client module 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155 contains executable instructions that enable a user to access, view, receive (e.g., by streaming and / or downloading), and play (e.g., on touchscreen 112 or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124) online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264, and send and otherwise manage emails with links to particular online videos. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 141 is used to send links to particular online videos, rather than email client module 140.

[0112] Each of the identified modules and applications corresponds to a set of executable instructions that perform one or more of the functions described above, as well as methods described in the present application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). The modules (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules; thus, various subsets of the modules are optionally combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the identified modules and data structures. Additionally, memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[0113] In some embodiments, device 100 is a device on which operation of a predefined set of functions is performed exclusively through a touchscreen and / or touchpad. By using the touchscreen and / or touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 100, the number of physical input control devices (push buttons, dials, etc.) on device 100 is optionally reduced.

[0114] The set of predefined functions performed exclusively through the touchscreen and / or touchpad optionally includes navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by a user, navigates device 100 to a main menu, home menu, or root menu from any user interface displayed on device 100. In such embodiments, a "menu button" is implemented using the touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.

[0115] 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 (in FIG. 1A) or 370 (in FIG. 3) includes an event sorter 170 (e.g., in operating system 126) and a respective application 136-1 (e.g., any of applications 136, 137-155, 380-390 described above).

[0116] Event sorter 170 receives the event information and determines application 136-1 and application view 191 of application 136-1 to which the event information should be delivered. Event sorter 170 includes event monitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174. In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes application internal state 192 that indicates the current application view(s) that are displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112 when the application is active or running. In some embodiments, device / global internal state 157 is used by event sorter 170 to determine which application(s) are currently active, and application internal state 192 is used by event sorter 170 to determine application view 191 to which the event information should be delivered.

[0117] In some embodiments, application internal state 192 includes additional information such as one or more of resume information used when application 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state information indicating information being displayed or prepared for display by application 136-1, a state queue to allow the user to return to a previous state or view of application 136-1, and a redo / undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.

[0118] Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripherals interface 118. The event information includes information about sub-events (e.g., a user's touch on touch-sensitive display system 112 as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 118 transmits information it receives from I / O subsystem 106 or sensors such as proximity sensor 166, accelerometer(s) 168, and / or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry 110). Information that peripherals interface 118 receives from I / O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display system 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.

[0119] In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and / or for longer than a predetermined period of time).

[0120] In some embodiments, the event sorter 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and / or an active event recognizer determination module 173 .

[0121] Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where in one or more views a sub-event occurred when touch-sensitive display system 112 displays more than one view. A view consists of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.

[0122] Another aspect of a user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes referred to herein as application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of each application) in which touches are detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within the application's programmatic or view hierarchy. For example, the lowest-level view in which touches are detected is optionally referred to as a hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as appropriate inputs is optionally determined based at least in part on the hit view of the initial touch that initiates the touch-based gesture.

[0123] Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies the hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy that should process the sub-events. In most situations, the hit view is the lowest-level view in which the initiating sub-event occurs (i.e., the first sub-event in a series of sub-events that form an event or potential event). Once a hit view is identified by the hit view determination module, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.

[0124] Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view(s) in the view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views containing the physical location of the sub-events are actively participating views, and therefore determines that all actively participating views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if a touch sub-event is entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy remain actively participating views.

[0125] Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches event information to event recognizers (e.g., event recognizer 180). In embodiments that include active event recognizer determination module 173, event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to the event recognizers determined by active event recognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores event information obtained by each event receiver module 182 in an event queue.

[0126] In some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event sorter 170. Alternatively, application 136-1 includes event sorter 170. In yet other embodiments, event sorter 170 is a stand-alone module or part of another module stored in memory 102, such as contact / motion module 130.

[0127] In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes multiple event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191, each containing instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application's user interface. Each application view 191 of application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers 180. Typically, each application view 191 includes multiple event recognizers 180. In other embodiments, one or more of the event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher-level object from which application 136-1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, each event handler 190 includes one or more of a data updater 176, an object updater 177, a GUI updater 178, and / or event data 179 received from event sorter 170. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176, object updater 177, or GUI updater 178 to update application internal state 192. Instead, one or more of the application views 191 include one or more respective event handlers 190. Also, in some embodiments, one or more of the data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in each application view 191.

[0128] Each event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179) from event sorter 170 and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer 180 includes an event receiver 182 and an event comparator 184. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 also includes metadata 183 and at least a subset of event delivery instructions 188 (optionally including sub-event delivery instructions).

[0129] The event receiver 182 receives event information from the event sorter 170. The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, information about a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as the position of the sub-event. When the sub-event involves a touch movement, the event information also optionally includes the speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, the event includes a device rotation from one orientation to another (e.g., from portrait to landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the device's current orientation (also called the device's attitude).

[0130] The event comparator 184 compares the event information with predefined event or sub-event definitions and determines the event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of the event or sub-event, based on the comparison. In some embodiments, the event comparator 184 includes an event definition 186. The event definition 186 includes a definition of an event (e.g., a predefined series of sub-events), such as Event 1 (187-1), Event 2 (187-2), etc. In some embodiments, the sub-events in Event 187 include, for example, a touch start, a touch end, a touch movement, a touch cessation, and multiple touches. In one example, the definition for Event 1 (187-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap includes, for example, a first touch (touch start) for a predetermined stage on the displayed object, a first lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined stage on the displayed object, a second touch (touch start) for a predetermined stage on the displayed object, and a second lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined stage. In another example, the definition for event 2 (187-2) is a drag on a displayed object. Drag includes, for example, a touch (or contact) for a predetermined step on a displayed object, a movement of the touch across the touch-sensitive display system 112, and a lift-off of the touch (end of the touch). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190.

[0131] In some embodiments, event definitions 187 include a definition of the event for each user interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user interface object is associated with the sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display system 112, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 190, event comparator 184 uses the results of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects the event handler associated with the sub-event and object that triggers the hit test.

[0132] In some embodiments, the definition for each event 187 also includes a delay action that delays delivery of the event information until it is determined whether a set of sub-events corresponds to the event recognizer's event type.

[0133] When the respective event recognizer 180 determines that the sequence of sub-events does not match any of the events in the event definition 186, the respective event recognizer 180 enters an event-disabled, event-failed, or event-ended state and thereafter ignores subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, if there are other event recognizers that remain active for the hit view, those event recognizers continue to track and process sub-events of the ongoing touch-based gesture.

[0134] In some embodiments, each event recognizer 180 includes metadata 183 with configurable properties, flags, and / or lists that indicate to actively participating event recognizers how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and / or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact or are enabled to interact with each other. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and / or lists that indicate how sub-events are delivered to various levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.

[0135] In some embodiments, each event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with an event when one or more specific sub-events of the event are recognized. In some embodiments, each event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to the event handler 190. Activating the event handler 190 is separate from sending (and deferring sending) the sub-events to the respective hit view. In some embodiments, the event recognizer 180 pops a flag associated with the recognized event, and the event handler 190 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs predefined processing.

[0136] In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver the event information to an event handler associated with the set of sub-events or to an actively participating view. The event handler associated with the set of sub-events or to an actively participating view receives the event information and performs predefined processing.

[0137] In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used by application 136-1. For example, data updater 176 updates phone numbers used by contacts module 137 or stores video files used by video and music player module 152. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates objects used by application 136-1. For example, object updater 177 creates new user interface objects or updates the positions of user interface objects. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 178 creates display information and sends it to graphics module 132 for display on the touch-sensitive display.

[0138] In some embodiments, event handler(s) 190 include or have access to data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In some embodiments, data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are contained in a single module of the respective application 136-1 or application view 191. In other embodiments, they are contained in two or more software modules.

[0139] It should be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event processing of a user's touch on a touch-sensitive display also applies to other forms of user input for operating multifunction device 100 with an input device, not all of which are initiated on the touchscreen. For example, mouse movements and mouse button presses, optionally coupled with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds, contact movements such as tapping, dragging, scrolling on a touchpad, pen stylus input, device movement, verbal commands, detected eye movement, biometric input, and / or any combination thereof, are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events that define the event to be recognized.

[0140] FIG. 2 illustrates portable multifunction device 100 with a touchscreen (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112, FIG. 1A ), according to some embodiments. The touchscreen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 200. In embodiments described below in conjunction with those embodiments, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale) or one or more styluses 203 (not drawn to scale). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (left to right, right to left, upward and / or downward), and / or a rotation of a finger in contact with device 100 (right to left, left to right, upward and / or downward). In some implementations or situations, accidental contact with a graphic does not select the graphic, for example, a swipe gesture sweeping over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.

[0141] Device 100 also optionally includes one or more physical buttons, such as a "home" or menu button 204. As previously described, menu button 204 is optionally used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications optionally running on device 100. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key within a GUI displayed on a touchscreen display.

[0142] In some embodiments, device 100 includes a touchscreen display, a menu button 204 (sometimes referred to as a home button 204), a push button 206 for powering the device on / off and locking the device, volume control button(s) 208, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 210, a headset jack 212, and a docking / charging external port 124. Push button 206 is optionally used to turn power on / off on the device by pressing and holding the button down for a predefined time interval, lock the device by pressing and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed, and / or unlock the device or initiate an unlocking process. In some embodiments, device 100 also accepts verbal input for activating or deactivating certain functions through microphone 113. Device 100 also optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting the intensity of a contact on touch-sensitive display system 112 and / or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating a tactile output for a user of device 100.

[0143] FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, according to some embodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child's learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or commercial controller). Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310, one or more network or other communication interfaces 360, memory 370, and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components. Communication bus 320 optionally includes circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communication between system components. Device 300 includes input / output (I / O) interface 330, which includes display 340, which is typically a touchscreen display. I / O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and / or mouse (or other pointing device) 350, as well as a touchpad 355, a tactile output generator 357 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1A ) for generating tactile output on device 300, sensors 359 (e.g., optical sensors, acceleration sensors, proximity sensors, touch-sensitive sensors, and / or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 165 described above with reference to FIG. 1A ). Memory 370 includes high-speed random-access memory such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random-access solid-state memory devices, and optionally includes non-volatile memory such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices located remotely from CPU(s) 310.In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures similar to, or a subset of, programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG. 1A). Additionally, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100. For example, memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores drawing module 380, presentation module 382, ​​word processing module 384, website creation module 386, disc authoring module 388, and / or spreadsheet module 390, while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG. 1A) optionally does not store those modules.

[0144] 3 are optionally stored in one or more of the memory devices mentioned above. Each of the identified modules corresponds to an instruction set that performs the functions described above. The identified modules or programs (i.e., instruction sets) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures, or modules; thus, various subsets of these modules are optionally combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the identified modules and data structures. Additionally, memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[0145] Attention is now directed to embodiments of a user interface (“UI”) that is optionally implemented on portable multifunction device 100.

[0146] 4A shows an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 100, according to some embodiments. A similar user interface is optionally implemented on device 300. In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof: signal strength indicator(s) for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals; ●Time ●Bluetooth indicator, ● Battery status indicator, A tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as: ○ An icon 416 for the phone module 138 labeled "Phone", optionally including an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages; An icon 418 for the email client module 140 labeled "Mail" that optionally includes an indicator 410 of the number of unread emails; ○ An icon 420 for the browser module 147 labeled "Browser" and ○ An icon 422 for the video and music player module 152 labeled "Music", and Icons for other applications, such as: ○ An icon 424 for the IM module 141 labeled "Messages"; ○ An icon 426 for the calendar module 148 labeled "Calendar", ○ An icon 428 for the image management module 144 labeled "Photos"; ○ An icon 430 for the camera module 143 labeled "Camera", ○ An icon 432 for the online video module 155 labeled "Online Video", icon 434 for stock widget 149-2 labeled "Stocks"; ○ An icon 436 for the map module 154 labeled "Map", ○ Icon 438 for weather widget 149-1 labeled "Weather", ○ Icon 440 for alarm clock widget 149-4, labeled "Clock"; ○ An icon 442 for the training support module 142 labeled "Training Support"; ○ An icon 444 for the notes module 153 labeled "Notes," and ○ An icon 446 for a settings application or module that provides access to settings for the device 100 and its various applications 136.

[0147] 4A are merely examples. For example, other labels are optionally used for various application icons. In some embodiments, the label for each application icon includes the name of the application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, the label for a particular application icon is separate from the name of the application corresponding to the particular application icon.

[0148] 4B shows an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300, FIG. 3) having touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., tablet or touchpad 355, FIG. 3) separate from display 450. Device 300 also optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 357) for detecting the intensity of a contact on touch-sensitive surface 451, and / or one or more tactile output generators 359 for generating a tactile output for a user of device 300.

[0149] Although many of the following examples are given with reference to input on touch screen display 112 (when the touch-sensitive surface and display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects input on a touch-sensitive surface separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 4B . In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in FIG. 4B ) has a major axis (e.g., 452 in FIG. 4B ) that corresponds to a major axis (e.g., 453 in FIG. 4B ) on the display (e.g., 450). According to these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., 460 and 462 in FIG. 4B ) with touch-sensitive surface 451 at positions that correspond to respective positions on the display (e.g., 460 corresponds to 468, and 462 corresponds to 470 in FIG. 4B ). In this manner, when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display, user input (e.g., contacts 460 and 462, and their movement) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in FIG. 4B ) is used by the device to operate a user interface on the display (e.g., 450 in FIG. 4B ) of the multifunction device. It should be understood that similar methods are optionally used for the other user interfaces described herein.

[0150] Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger input (e.g., finger touches, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures, etc.), it should be understood that in some embodiments, one or more of those finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is optionally replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a touch), followed by cursor movement along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of moving the touch). As another example, a tap gesture is optionally replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is positioned over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detecting a touch followed by ceasing contact detection). Similarly, it should be understood that when multiple user inputs are detected simultaneously, multiple computer mice are optionally used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger touches are optionally used simultaneously.

[0151] As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates the current portion of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations involving a cursor or other location marker, the cursor functions as a “focus selector” such that when input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 355 in FIG. 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B ) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted according to the detected input. In some implementations involving a touchscreen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 in FIG. 1A or touchscreen in FIG. 4A ) that allows direct interaction with user interface elements on the touchscreen display, a contact detected on the touchscreen acts as a “focus selector” such that when input (e.g., a press input by a contact) is detected on the touchscreen display at the location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted according to the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one area of ​​the user interface to another area of ​​the user interface (e.g., by using the tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another) without a corresponding cursor movement or contact movement on the touchscreen display, and in those implementations, the focus selector moves to follow the movement of focus between different areas of the user interface. Regardless of the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally a user interface element (or a contact on a touchscreen display) that is controlled by the user to communicate the user's intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating to the device the element of the user interface that the user intends to interact with).For example, the position of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, touch, or selection box) over a respective button while a press input on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touchscreen) is detected indicates the user's intent to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on the device's display).

[0152] As used herein and in the claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact or a stylus contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or a proxy for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values ​​that includes at least four different values ​​and more typically includes hundreds (e.g., at least 256) different values. The intensity of a contact is optionally determined (or measured) using various techniques and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors under or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are optionally used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., weighted average or sum) to determine an estimated force of the contact. Similarly, the pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is optionally used to determine the pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Instead, the size and / or change in the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface, the capacitance and / or change in the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate the contact, and / or the resistivity and / or change in the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate the contact are optionally used as proxies for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the surrogate measure of the force or pressure of the contact is used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold is exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the surrogate measure). In some implementations, the surrogate measure of the force or pressure of the contact is converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold is exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of contact as an attribute of user input allows a user to access additional functionality that, in some circumstances, is not otherwise easily accessible by a user on a reduced-size device having a limited area for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display) and / or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, touch-sensitive surface, or physical / mechanical controls such as knobs or buttons).

[0153] In some embodiments, contact / motion module 130 uses one or more sets of intensity thresholds to determine whether an action has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined according to software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation threshold of a particular physical actuator and may be adjusted without modifying the physical hardware of device 100). For example, the mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touchscreen display may be set to any of a wide range of predefined thresholds without modifying the trackpad or touchscreen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a device user is provided with a software setting to adjust one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and / or by adjusting multiple intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter).

[0154] As used herein and in the claims, the term "characteristic intensity" of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on a plurality of intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is optionally based on a predefined number of intensity samples or a set of intensity samples collected during a predefined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, before detecting lift-off of the contact, before or after detecting the start of contact movement, before detecting the end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in the intensity of the contact, and / or before or after detecting a decrease in the intensity of the contact). The characteristic intensity of the contact is optionally based on one or more of the maximum intensity of the contact, the mean value of the intensity of the contact, the average value of the intensity of the contact, the top 10% of the intensity of the contact, half the maximum intensity of the contact, 90% of the maximum intensity of the contact, a value generated by low-pass filtering the intensity of the contact starting over a predefined period or at a predefined time, etc. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation is performed by the user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds optionally includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact having a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact having a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold but not the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact having a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second intensity threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, the comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more intensity thresholds is not used to determine whether to perform the first operation or the second operation, but rather to determine whether to perform one or more operations (e.g., to execute a respective option or refrain from executing a respective operation).

[0155] In some embodiments, portions of the gesture are identified for purposes of determining the characteristic intensity. For example, the touch-sensitive surface optionally receives successive swipe contacts (e.g., a drag gesture) that transition from a start position to an end position where the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end position may, in some circumstances, be based on only a portion of the successive swipe contacts (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end position) rather than the entire successive swipe contacts. In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm is optionally applied to the intensity of the swipe contact before determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of an unweighted moving average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and / or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, the smoothing algorithms remove small increases or decreases in the intensity of the swipe contact for purposes of determining the characteristic intensity.

[0156] The user interface diagrams described herein optionally include one or more intensity thresholds (e.g., a touch-detection intensity threshold IT0, a light pressure intensity threshold IT L , deep pressure intensity threshold IT D (e.g., IT, at least initially L ), and / or one or more other intensity thresholds (e.g., TI L An intensity threshold lower than IT H), which indicates the current intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to the light or deep intensity threshold. This intensity diagram is typically not part of the displayed user interface, but is provided to aid in interpretation of the diagram. In some embodiments, the light pressure intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device performs an operation typically associated with clicking a physical mouse button or trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep pressure intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device performs an operation different from an operation typically associated with clicking a physical mouse button or trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light pressure intensity threshold (e.g., above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold IT0 below which the contact is no longer detected), the device moves a focus selector according to the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light or deep intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise noted, the intensity thresholds are consistent across different sets of user interface diagrams.

[0157] In some embodiments, the device's response to an input detected by the device depends on criteria based on the intensity of contact during the input. For example, for some "light press" inputs, the intensity of contact during the input exceeding a first intensity threshold triggers a first response. In some embodiments, the device's response to an input detected by the device depends on criteria including both the intensity of contact during the input and time-based criteria. For example, for some "deep press" inputs, the intensity of contact during the input exceeding a second intensity threshold greater than the first intensity threshold for light presses triggers a second response only if a delay time has elapsed between meeting the first intensity threshold and meeting the second intensity threshold. This delay time is typically less than 200 ms (milliseconds) (e.g., 40 ms, 100 ms, or 120 ms, depending on the magnitude of the second intensity threshold, with the delay time increasing as the second intensity threshold increases). This delay time helps avoid accidental recognition of deep press inputs. As another example, for some "deep presses," there is a period of reduced sensitivity that occurs after the first intensity threshold is met. During the period of decreased sensitivity, the second intensity threshold is increased. This temporary increase in the second intensity threshold also helps to avoid accidental deep pressure inputs. For other deep pressure inputs, the response to deep pressure input detection does not depend on a time-based criterion.

[0158] In some embodiments, one or more of the input intensity threshold and / or corresponding output vary based on one or more factors such as user settings, contact movement, input timing, running application, rate at which intensity is applied, number of simultaneous inputs, user history, environmental factors (e.g., ambient noise), position of focus selector, etc. Exemplary factors are described in U.S. Patent Application Nos. 14 / 399,606 and 14 / 624,296, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.

[0159] For example, FIG. 4C illustrates a dynamic intensity threshold 480 that varies over time based in part on the intensity of touch input 476 over time. Dynamic intensity threshold 480 is the sum of two components: a first component 474 that decays over time after a predefined delay time p1 from when touch input 476 is first detected, and a second component 478 that tracks the intensity of touch input 476 over time. The initial high intensity threshold of first component 474 reduces accidentally triggering a “deep press” response while still allowing an immediate “deep press” response if touch input 476 provides sufficient intensity. Second component 478 reduces unintentionally triggering a “deep press” response due to gradual intensity variations in the touch input. In some embodiments, a “deep press” response is triggered when touch input 476 meets dynamic intensity threshold 480 (e.g., at point 481 in FIG. 4C ).

[0160] FIG. 4D illustrates another dynamic intensity threshold 486 (e.g., intensity threshold I D ) Figure 4D also shows two other intensity thresholds, the first intensity threshold IT H and a second intensity threshold I L In FIG. 4D, the touch input 484 reaches the first intensity threshold IT before time p2. H and a second intensity threshold IT L 4D, the dynamic intensity threshold 486 is set to a value greater than the predetermined delay time p1 from time 482 (second intensity threshold IT L This type of dynamic intensity threshold decays over time, with the decay starting at time 488 (when the response associated with the first intensity threshold IT is triggered). H or the second intensity threshold I L A dynamic intensity threshold IT immediately or simultaneously triggers a response associated with a lower intensity threshold, such as D and reducing accidental triggering of the associated response.

[0161] FIG. 4E illustrates yet another dynamic intensity threshold 492 (e.g., intensity threshold I D) is shown. In FIG. 4E, the intensity threshold IT L The response associated with the intensity threshold I is triggered after a delay time p2 from when the touch input 490 is first detected. At the same time, the dynamic intensity threshold 492 decays after a predefined delay time p1 from when the touch input 490 is first detected. Thus, the intensity threshold I can be lowered without releasing the touch input 490. L The decrease in intensity of touch input 490 after triggering a response associated with the intensity threshold I, followed by an increase in the intensity of touch input 490, indicates that the intensity of touch input 490 has exceeded another intensity threshold, e.g., intensity threshold I. L Even when below the intensity threshold IT D A response associated with the event may be triggered (e.g., at time 494).

[0162] Light pressure intensity threshold IT L Light to strong pressure below the threshold IT L and deep pressure intensity threshold IT D Increasing the characteristic intensity of contact to an intensity between is sometimes referred to as a "light press" input. D From an intensity below the threshold IT D An increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact to an intensity above the contact detection intensity threshold IT0 is sometimes referred to as a "deep press" input. L An increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to an intensity between ITO and ITO may be referred to as detecting a contact on the touch surface. A decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold IT0 to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold IT0 may be referred to as detecting lift-off of the contact from the touch surface. In some embodiments, IT0 is zero. In some embodiments, IT0 is greater than zero. In some figures, shaded circles or ellipses are used to represent the intensity of contacts on the touch-sensitive surface. In some figures, unshaded circles or ellipses are used to represent each contact on the touch-sensitive surface without specifying the intensity of each contact.

[0163] In some embodiments described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture including the respective pressure input, or in response to detecting the respective pressure input performed on the respective contact (or contacts), where the respective pressure inputs are detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or contacts) above a pressure input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operations are performed in response to detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact above a pressure input intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operations are performed on the “downstroke” of the respective pressure input). In some embodiments, the pressure input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above a pressure input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the pressure input intensity threshold, and the respective operations are performed in response to detecting a subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the pressure input threshold (e.g., the respective operations are performed on the “upstroke” of the respective pressure input).

[0164] In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental input, sometimes referred to as “jitter,” and the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold that has a predefined relationship to the pressure input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units below the pressure input intensity threshold, or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable percentage of the pressure input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the pressure input includes an increase in the intensity of each contact above the pressure input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in the intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the pressure input intensity threshold, and a respective operation is performed in response to detecting a subsequent decrease in the intensity of each contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., a respective operation is performed on the “upstroke” of a respective pressure input). Similarly, in some embodiments, a pressure input is detected only when the device detects an increase in the intensity of the contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the pressure input intensity threshold, and optionally a subsequent decrease in the intensity of the contact to an intensity below the hysteresis intensity, and a respective operation is performed in response to detecting the pressure input (e.g., an increase in the intensity of the contact or a decrease in the intensity of the contact, depending on the context).

[0165] For ease of explanation, descriptions of operations performed in response to a pressure input associated with a pressure input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including a pressure input are optionally triggered in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of the contact above the pressure input intensity threshold, an increase in the intensity of the contact from an intensity below a hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the pressure input intensity threshold, a decrease in the intensity of the contact below the pressure input intensity threshold, or a decrease in the intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the pressure input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in the intensity of the contact below a pressure input intensity threshold, the operation is optionally performed in response to detecting a decrease in the intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to and lower than the pressure input intensity threshold. As described above, in some embodiments, the triggering of such responses also depends on time-based criteria being met (e.g., a delay time elapsed between the first intensity threshold being met and the second intensity threshold being met). User Interface and Related Processing

[0166] Attention is now directed to embodiments of a user interface (“UI”) and associated processing that are optionally implemented on an electronic device such as portable multifunction device 100 or device 300 having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and (optionally) one or more sensors that detect the intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface.

[0167] 5A1-5A77 show exemplary user interfaces for navigating between user interfaces, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces in those figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 6A-6AL, 7A-7F, 8A-8E, and 10A-10B. For ease of explanation, some of the embodiments are discussed with reference to operations performed on a device having touch-sensitive display system 112. In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., the face centroid of each contact or a point associated with each contact), or the face centroid of two or more contacts detected on touch-sensitive display system 112. However, similar operations are optionally performed on a device having display 450 and a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the user interface shown in the figures on display 450 with a focus selector.

[0168] For ease of explanation, some of the embodiments are discussed with reference to operations performed on a device that does not have a home button, and gestures that meet predefined criteria are used to trigger dismissal of a currently displayed user interface and display of a home screen user interface. Although not shown in Figures 5A1-5A77, in some embodiments, a home button (e.g., a mechanical button, a solid-state button, or a virtual button) is included on the device and is used to trigger dismissal of a currently displayed user interface and display of a home screen user interface (e.g., in response to a single press input) and / or display of a multitasking user interface (e.g., in response to a double press input).

[0169] 5A1-5A77 illustrate an exemplary embodiment of a user interface selection process that enables a user to efficiently navigate among multiple user interfaces on an electronic device, e.g., quickly switch between different application and system user interfaces, according to some embodiments. The exemplary user interface for the user interface selection process includes representations of multiple user interfaces for applications associated with the electronic device (e.g., recently opened applications, currently displayed applications, and a system control panel) displayed as a virtual stack (e.g., a “stack”) of cards, with each card in the stack representing a user interface for a different application. The cards are also referred to herein as an “application view” when they correspond to a user interface for a recently opened application, or a “control panel view” when they correspond to a user interface for a control panel. User input (e.g., touches, swipe / drag gestures, flick gestures, etc.) detected on the touchscreen 112 (e.g., the touch-sensitive surface) is used to navigate among user interfaces that can be selected for display on the screen. In some embodiments, the home screen user interface is optionally displayed as a “card” in the virtual stack of cards. In some embodiments, the home screen user interface is displayed in a display layer below the stack of cards.

[0170] While the device is displaying any interface, a gesture initiated at the bottom of the screen (e.g., within a predefined region of the device near the edge of the display (e.g., an edge region including a predefined portion (e.g., 20 pixels wide) of the display near the bottom edge of the device)) triggers a user interface selection process that directs navigation between multiple user interfaces based on the speed and direction of the input, and optionally based on movement parameters and characteristics of the currently displayed user interface object (e.g., a card). The device replaces the display of the current user interface with the card representing the user interface. The user has the option, according to some embodiments, to use different gestures to navigate (i) to the home screen, (ii) to the application displayed on the screen immediately before the user interface displayed when the user interface selection process was triggered, (iii) to a control panel user interface, (iv) to an application switcher user interface that allows the user to select from applications previously displayed on the screen, or (v) back to the user interface displayed when the user interface selection process was triggered. During input, the device provides dynamic visual feedback indicating which navigation choice will be made once input is completed, facilitating efficient user navigation between multiple selections. In some embodiments, the visual feedback and user interface response is fluid and reversible.

[0171] An exemplary user interface for an application running on an electronic device includes visual indications (e.g., home affordance 5002) that provide visual guidance to the user regarding the location of the edge region where the device is ready for a navigation gesture to be initiated, and optionally whether navigation is limited in the current operational mode of the currently displayed application (e.g., the absence of a home affordance indicates that navigation is limited and that a confirming input is required to navigate between user interfaces, and optionally whether extended navigation gestures are required to navigate between user interfaces (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 5B1-5B33)). In some embodiments, the home affordances are not activatable or directly responsive to touch-input, for example, in a manner similar to a virtual button.

[0172] 5A1-5A8 illustrate an example embodiment in which the electronic device navigates to an application switcher user interface because an input triggers a user interface selection process and indicates movement of a card in the stack beyond a first movement threshold (optionally beyond a second movement threshold).

[0173] Figure 5A1 shows a web browsing user interface with time 404 and state 402 indicators in the upper left and right corners of the screen, respectively. After a user interface selection process is activated by contact 5004 moving upward from the bottom of the screen in Figure 5A2, the web browsing user interface is replaced by card 5010 representing a web browser user interface in Figure 5A3. As input moves upward on the screen in Figures 5A3-5A5, card 5010 dynamically shrinks, revealing a blurred view of the home screen in the background and an expanded status bar 5008 in the foreground (status bar 5008 optionally appears moving downward from the upper left and right hand corners of the display, or is made visible by the shrunken card 5010). In FIG. 5A6, when movement 5006 of contact 5004 ceases, cards 5014 (representing a messaging application user interface displayed on the screen in front of the web browsing user interface) and 5016 (representing a control panel user interface (e.g., control center)) appear to be displayed parallel to card 5010, indicating that input has now ended, causing the device to display an application switcher user interface. In FIG. 5A7, input has ended, causing the device to display the application switcher user interface in FIG. 5A8, while several cards in the stack are displayed. Cards 5010, 5014, and 5016, which appear relatively coplanar while input is active (e.g., in FIG. 5A6), are animated to form a stack in FIGS. 5A7-5A8, with control panel card 5016 sliding above web browsing card 5010 and messaging card 5014 sliding below web browsing card 5010. Other cards representing the user interface of the application last displayed before the messaging user interface (eg, card 5022 representing the user interface of an email application) appear below messaging card 5014 in the stack.Application icons (e.g., Safari icon 5012 and Messages icon 5020; see also Email icon 5028 and Settings icon 5032 in Figures 5A9-5A13) are displayed within the application switcher user interface to facilitate quicker identification of the application associated with the user interface shown on the card.

[0174] Figures 5A9-5A14 show an exemplary embodiment in which an application switcher user interface is used to navigate between previously displayed user interfaces (e.g., switch between applications). Movement 5026 of contact 5024 to the right in Figures 5A9-5A11 scrolls through a stack of user interface cards. As cards 5016, 5010, and 5014 from the top of the stack are pushed off the right-hand side of the screen, additional cards 5030 and 5034 become visible from the bottom of the stack in Figures 5A10-5A11. After selection of email card 5022 in Figure 5A13, the device replaces the application switcher user interface with an email user interface in Figure 5A14.

[0175] 5A15-5A18 illustrate example embodiments in which input results in navigation within an application rather than between a different application's user interface and a system user interface because the input does not meet the criteria that would trigger a user interface selection process. For example, a tap gesture involving contact 5037 on back button 5035 in FIG. 5A15 causes the device to navigate from the Apple webpage to the "news about sports" webpage in FIG. 5A16 rather than triggering a user interface selection process because there was no upward movement of contact 5037 from the bottom edge of the screen. Similarly, an upward swipe gesture involving movement 5041 of contact 5039 in FIG. 5A17 causes the device to navigate to the "news about sports" webpage in FIG. 5A18 rather than triggering a user interface selection process because the swipe gesture did not begin at the bottom of the screen.

[0176] 5A19-5A25 illustrate an example embodiment in which the electronic device re-navigates to the home screen because an input triggers a user interface selection process and indicates movement of a card in the stack beyond a second movement threshold.

[0177] Figure 5A19 shows an exemplary email user interface. A user interface selection process is activated by contact 5040 moving upward from the bottom of the screen, resulting in the email user interface being replaced by card 5022 representing the email user interface in Figure 5A20. In Figures 5A20-5A21, because movement 5042 of contact 5040 was slow and contact 5040 did not meet predefined movement criteria for navigating to the home screen (e.g., beyond a certain distance threshold), cards 5016 (control panel) and 5010 (web browsing) are displayed to indicate that termination of input will cause the device to navigate to an application switcher user interface. As movement 5042 accelerates and / or contact 5040 meets predefined movement criteria for navigating to the home screen (e.g., beyond a distance threshold), cards 5016 and 5010 disappear in Figure 5A22, indicating that termination of input will cause the device to navigate to the home screen as opposed to navigating back to the application switcher user interface. In Figures 5A19-5A24, as contact 5040 moves upward on the screen, the blur of the home screen displayed behind the cards gradually decreases, and the icons displayed on the home screen appear to move closer to the user as they gradually come into focus, further indicating that navigation is toward the home screen.

[0178] In Figure 5A24, because input has finished, the device navigates to the home screen in Figure 5A25 while only a single card is displayed. This contrasts with the navigation events in Figures 5A2-5A8, where because input has finished while the device was displaying multiple cards from an on-screen stack, the device navigates to the application switcher user interface. While navigating to home, card 5022 appears to shrink to a start icon for the mail application.

[0179] Figures 5A25-5A30 show an exemplary embodiment in which an electronic device navigates to an email application user interface from a home screen. Figure 5A25 shows a home screen with multiple application start icons. Similar to navigation events triggered from application user interfaces as shown in Figures 5A2 and 5A19, movement 5048 of contact 5046 upward from the bottom of the screen in Figure 5A25 triggers a user interface selection process from the home screen. Rather than replacing the home screen display with cards, as is done for the web browsing user interface in Figure 5A3 and the email user interface in Figure 5A20, the home screen appears to disappear from the screen, and cards 5016 (control panel) and 5022 (email) slide across the screen in Figure 5A26. Cards from the stack appear to come in from the left-hand side of the screen, and cards for the control panel appear to come in from the right-hand side of the screen. In Figure 5A27, as contact 5046 continues to move upward, control panel card 5016 slides over Mail card 5022 completing the stack, with the home screen continuing to blur in the background, indicating the device navigates to an application switching user interface. Upon completion of input in Figure 5A28, cards 5010 (web browsing) and 5014 (messaging) slide under Mail card 5022, completing the stack. Selection of Mail card 5022 in Figure 5A29 instructs the device to display the Mail user interface in Figure 5A30. In some embodiments, when the movement of contact 5046 does not include a significant vertical component and is substantially horizontal to the left (e.g., a leftward swipe gesture starting from the bottom edge of the screen, such as the gesture with contact 5074 shown in FIGS. 5A57-5A58), the control panel user interface slides in from the right and is overlaid on the home screen user interface (e.g., in the final state shown in FIG. 5A77).

[0180] 5A31-5A36 illustrate example embodiments in which an input results in navigation within or between applications, depending on whether the input meets criteria that trigger a user interface selection process. FIG. 5A31 shows a mail user interface displaying previews 5049 of multiple email messages. A swipe gesture involving movement 5053 of contact 5051 across email preview 5049-d in FIG. 5A32 causes the device to mark email preview 5049-d as read in FIG. 5A33 rather than navigating between different application user interfaces or to a system user interface because it did not originate from the bottom of the screen. Meanwhile, a swipe gesture involving movement 5054 of contact 5052 across email preview 5049-e in FIGS. 5A34-5A35 causes the device to navigate to a previously displayed web browsing user interface in FIG. 5A36 rather than marking the email preview as read because it originated from the bottom of the screen.

[0181] 5A2-5A8 and 5A19-5A25, which cause the device to navigate to the application switcher user interface and the home screen, respectively, the inputs shown in Figures 5A34-5A36 cause the device to navigate to the web browsing user interface because the horizontal component of movement 5054 is much greater than the vertical component of movement 5054. The inputs involve dragging web browsing card 5010 from the left-hand side of the screen onto the screen while pushing mail card 5022 back into the screen and then sliding it out from the right-hand side of the screen. The card appears to move over the home screen and is blurred in the background.

[0182] 5A37-5A39 illustrate an exemplary embodiment in which a device re-navigates to a displayed user interface after input has ended because the input did not meet the criteria for navigating to another user interface (e.g., there is insufficient movement to fully trigger the user interface selection process). FIG. 5A37 illustrates a web browsing user interface. Input including movement 5058 of contact 5056 begins to trigger the user interface selection process, as indicated by the replacement of the web browsing user interface with web browsing card 5010 in FIG. 5A38. However, because the input ends before contact 5056 has moved far enough to fully trigger the user interface selection process, the device navigates to re-displaying the web browser user interface in FIG. 5A39.

[0183] 5A40-5A56 illustrate an exemplary embodiment in which forward and backward navigation within a card stack is enabled in response to multiple consecutive swipe gestures (e.g., leftward / rightward edge swipe gestures or up-leftward / up-rightward arc swipe gestures), and the stack of cards is not updated immediately after navigating to a different user interface. FIG. 5A40 illustrates a web browsing user interface including a time 404 and state 402 indicator. A first swipe gesture to the right initiated in FIG. 5A40 navigates the device to the email user interface in FIG. 5A42, which was the application user interface displayed immediately before the web browsing user interface. A second swipe gesture to the right is initiated in FIG. 5A43 before the stack is resorted to reflect navigation to the email user interface. The second swipe gesture results in navigation to the next user interface represented in the stack, the messaging user interface, as shown in FIG. 5A45. A third swipe gesture to the left is initiated in Figure 5A46 before the stack is again resorted to reflect navigation to the messaging user interface. The third swipe gesture results in navigation forward in the stack again to the email user interface in Figure 5A48, rather than backward because the gestures are in the opposite direction. A fourth swipe gesture to the right, initiated in Figure 5A49, navigates the device backward in the stack to the messaging user interface in Figure 5A51.

[0184] After each of the first three navigation events, the stack is not re-sorted due to another navigation gesture being detected before a predetermined amount of time (e.g., TT1) has elapsed since the end of the previous navigation gesture. The fact that the threshold amount of time has not elapsed is visually indicated by the absence of the time 404 and state 402 indicators immediately after the navigation event. As shown in FIG. 5A52, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed without detecting another navigation input, the device re-sorts the stack to reflect navigation to the messaging user interface. This is indicated by the display of the time 404 and state 402 indicators. In some embodiments, the size of the center card increases slightly to indicate that it is now the top card in the stack. Thus, after movement 5072 of contact 5070 triggers the user interface selection process in FIG. 5A52, cards 5014 (messaging) and 5010 (web browsing) are displayed side by side in FIG. 5A53, reflecting the last two applications used on the device. Although the mail user interface has been displayed on the screen (in FIG. 5A49) more recently than the web browsing user interface (in FIG. 5A40), the mail card 5022 is not re-sorted in the stack because the user interface was only temporarily displayed while the user navigated through the stack.

[0185] 5A57-5A59 illustrate example embodiments in which a navigation gesture to the left from any user interface causes navigation to a control panel user interface (e.g., the center of control). FIG. 5A57 illustrates a messaging user interface with time 404 and state 402 indicators representing that the underlying card stack has been resorted since the last navigation event (e.g., navigation from the email application to the messages application in FIGS. 5A49-5A51). A left swipe gesture within the bottom edge region of the screen (including movement 5076 of contact 5074 in FIG. 5A57) causes a control panel view 5016 to slide over the messaging user interface from the right-hand side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 5A58. In some embodiments, the control panel view 5016 is semi-transparent, allowing portions of the message interface to at least partially peek through below the visible portion of the control panel view 5016. Completion of the input results in navigation to the control panel user interface in FIG. 5A59, which is displayed over a blurred view of the messaging user interface that was displayed when the user interface navigation input was initiated. In contrast to the left swipe gesture in FIGS. 5A46-5A48, which caused forward navigation within the stack, the left swipe in FIGS. 5A57-5A59 causes navigation to the control panel user interface because there are no user interface cards above the messaging cards in the stack when the messaging user interface is actively displayed on the screen. In FIGS. 5A46-5A48, the email card is above the messaging card in the stack because the user was actively navigating between user interfaces in the stack (e.g., the stack has not been reordered because the time threshold TT1 has not yet been met).

[0186] 5A52-5A56 illustrate an exemplary embodiment in which the user interface selection process is fluid. FIG. 5A52 shows an upward swipe gesture triggering a user interface selection process from the messaging user interface. In response, the device displays cards 5014 (messaging), 5010 (web browsing), and 5016 (control panel) in FIG. 5A53 because the rate of movement 5072 is below a first movement threshold and the position of contact 5070 is below a first position threshold, indicating that completion of input will result in navigation to the application switcher user interface. Continuation of the up and left gesture in FIG. 5A54 causes cards 5010 (web browsing) and 5016 (control panel) to disappear, causing completion of input to navigate to the home screen. Because the user interface selection process is fluid, messaging card 5014 continues to shrink and move up and left on the screen in accordance with movement 5072 of contact 5070. As movement 5072 of contact 5070 changes direction toward the bottom of the screen, in FIG. 5A55, messaging card 5014 becomes larger and the home screen is blurred in the background, indicating that end of input will result in navigation back to the messaging user interface, as shown in FIG. 5A56. In some embodiments, as contact 5070 moves downward between the states shown in FIG. 5A54 and 5A55, multiple cards 5010, 5014, and 5016 are optionally re-displayed to indicate that after end of input, if end of input is then detected, the device will navigate to the application switcher user interface (e.g., in the manner shown in FIG. 5A53).

[0187] 5A60-5A63 illustrate an exemplary embodiment in which an input navigates from a control panel user interface (e.g., the control panel) to an application switcher user interface. FIG. 5A60 shows an upward swipe gesture from the bottom of the screen triggering a user interface selection process from the control panel user interface. In response, a stack appears in FIG. 5A61 sliding out from under the control panel card 5016. As the swipe gesture continues to ascend, in FIG. 5A62 the stack continues to expand from under the control panel card 5016, indicating that completion of the input results in navigation to the application switcher user interface, as shown in FIG. 5A63.

[0188] 5A64-5A69 illustrate exemplary embodiments in which an application is closed within the application switcher user interface. FIG. 5A64 illustrates the initiation of a long press input by contact 5084 on messaging card 5014 within the application switcher user interface. In FIG. 5A65, when contact 5084 is detected at its initial touch-down position less than a threshold movement amount for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., TT2) to satisfy the touch-hold requirement, the device activates an application termination mode and displays close application affordance 5086 on the application card in the stack. Selection of close application affordance 5086 on messaging card 5014 in FIG. 5A67 results in the messaging application being closed on the device, as shown by the removal of messaging card 5014 from the stack in FIG. 5A68. In some embodiments, closing an application from within the application switcher user interface results in the deletion of retained state information, and when the application is restarted, the application starts from a default starting user interface as opposed to a user interface corresponding to the state in which the application was last accessed by the user. In response to closing the messages application, the web browsing card 5010 and email card 5022 move up in the stack, revealing the settings card 5030 in the stack.

[0189] 5A69-5A71 illustrate an exemplary embodiment in which a device navigates from an application switcher user interface to a home screen in response to an upward swipe by contact 5090 with movement 5092. FIG. 5A69 illustrates an upward swipe gesture within the application switcher user interface (e.g., on web browsing card 5010). In FIG. 5A70, in response to the upward swipe gesture by contact 5090, web browsing card 5010 shrinks and moves upward, other cards in the stack disappear from view, and the home screen begins to come into focus in the background, indicating that termination of input results in navigation to the home screen, as shown in FIG. 5A71.

[0190] Figures 5A72-5A77 illustrate exemplary embodiments in which an electronic device navigates from a home screen to a control panel user interface. Figure 5A72 shows a home screen with multiple start icons. Upward movement 5096 of contact 5094 from the bottom of the screen in Figure 5A72 triggers a user interface selection process from the home screen. As contact 5094 moves upward on the screen, the home screen appears to disappear from the screen, and cards 5016 (control panel) and 5022 (mail) slide onto the screen in Figure 5A73. As contact 5094 continues to move upward in Figure 5A74, control panel card 5016 slides over mail card 5022, forming a stack, and the home screen continues to be blurred in the background, indicating that the device has navigated to an application switching user interface. Upon completion of the input in Figure 5A75, cards 5010 (web browsing) and 5014 (messaging) slide below mail card 5022, completing the stack. Selection of control panel card 5016 with contact 5098 in Figure 5A76 results in navigation to the control panel user interface in Figure 5A77. The control panel is displayed in a semi-transparent state over the blurred view of the home screen that was displayed when the user interface navigation input was initiated in Figure 5A72.

[0191] 5B1-5B33 show exemplary user interfaces for restricting navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a system user interface or a user interface of another application) in response to a navigation gesture when a currently displayed application is determined to be protected, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces in those figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 9A-9D . For ease of explanation, some of the embodiments are discussed with reference to operations performed on a device having touch-sensitive display system 112. In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., an enantiomeric center of each contact or a point associated with each contact), or an enantiomeric center of two or more contacts detected on touch-sensitive display system 112. However, similar operations, along with a focus selector, are optionally performed on a device having display 450 and a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the user interface shown in the figures on display 450.

[0192] 5B1 , the media player application is operating in a first mode (e.g., interactive playback mode). The user interface 5302 of the media player application in the interactive playback mode includes multiple control areas, including a media playback area (e.g., a media playback window for displaying media content), a playback control area (e.g., a media scrambler, a fast-forward affordance, a pause / play affordance, and a rewind affordance), a network interaction control area (e.g., affordances for routing media content to an output device, commenting (e.g., liking or disliking) the media content in a social networking forum, sharing the media content with others, etc.), and a related content area (e.g., thumbnails of content that link to other media content related to the currently selected content in the media playback window). The user interface 5302 is designed to facilitate user interaction with the user interface (e.g., browsing related content in the related content area or initiating network interaction via affordances in the network interaction control area) while playback of media in the media playback area is ongoing. In FIG. 5B1, home affordance 5002 is overlaid on user interface 5302 to indicate the edge region of touch screen 112 from which, in some circumstances, a navigation gesture is initiated (e.g., an upward swipe gesture that causes the display of an application switcher user interface or a home screen display user interface, or a sideways swipe that causes the display of a control panel user interface or a recently opened applications user interface).

[0193] 5B1-5B3 show that when a navigation gesture that meets the home display criteria is detected, the device stops displaying user interface 5302 after the navigation gesture ends and displays home screen user interface 5314. In FIG. 5B1, contact 5312 is detected within the bottom edge region of touch screen 112 (e.g., the region visually indicated by home affordance 5002). In FIG. 5B2, following upward movement of contact 5312, user interface 5302 shrinks into application view 5304 (e.g., a scaled, persistent, or static image of user interface 5302, also referred to as "card" 5304) that is dragged by contact 5312. When the application switcher display criteria are met and before lift-off of contact 5312 is detected, a control panel view 5306 (e.g., also referred to as "card" 5306) corresponding to a control panel user interface and an application view 5308 (e.g., also referred to as "card" 5308) corresponding to a recently opened application (e.g., a web browser application) are displayed on either side of the application view 5304, with the views moving and shrinking together as contact 5312 moves upward across touch screen 112. The views 5304, 5306, and 5308 are overlaid on a blurred version of the home screen user interface (e.g., blurred home screen 5310). In FIG. 5B3 , after lift-off of contact 5312 is detected and the home display criteria are met (e.g., contact 5312 moves beyond a threshold position (e.g., three-quarters of the screen height) on touch screen 112), home screen user interface 5314 is displayed on touch screen 112.

[0194] 5B4-5B10 illustrate alternative scenarios to those illustrated in FIGS. 5B1-5B3. In FIGS. 5B4-5B10, a media player application is operating in full-screen playback mode. Intentional navigation to other user interfaces during media playback within the media playback area is relatively rare, and accidental navigation to other user interfaces is considered disruptive by many users. As such, a media player application operating in full-screen playback mode is defined as an application that is currently "protected" from the effects of normal navigation gestures (e.g., gestures to navigate to the home screen user interface, application switcher user interface, recently opened applications, or control panel user interface).

[0195] 5B4-5B5, while a media player application is operating in an interactive playback mode in which it is playing media content (e.g., a video of a baseball game), device 100 detects that the orientation of device 100 has changed from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation. In response to detecting the change in device orientation, device 100 switches from the interactive playback mode to a full-screen display mode (as shown in FIG. 5B5). In FIG. 5B5, full-screen playback user interface 5316 includes only the playing content (e.g., the video of the baseball game continues to play after device 100 is rotated), and other control affordances and user interface objects cease to be displayed on touch screen 112. Home affordance 5002 is not visible on user interface 5316.

[0196] 5B5-5B7 show that while content is being played in full-screen playback mode, contact 5318 is detected near the bottom edge of the touchscreen (e.g., "bottom edge" is redefined to be the long edge of device 100 at the left (e.g., the left edge based on the device being held in an upright landscape orientation) after device 100 is rotated to the landscape orientation shown in FIG. 5B5). In FIG. 5B6, following upward movement of contact 5318, home affordance 5322 (a longer version of home affordance 5002) is displayed overlaid on user interface 5316 near the bottom edge of touchscreen 112. Additionally, an upward swipe gesture from the bottom edge is configured to cause the display of media selection panel 5320 within the media player application. As shown in FIG. 5B6, media selection panel 5320, which includes multiple media items related to the currently playing media content, is dragged upward from the bottom edge of the touchscreen following upward movement of contact 5318. In Figure 5B6, user interface 5316 remains displayed during upward movement of contact 5318. Playback of media content optionally continues during movement of contact 5318. In Figure 5B7, liftoff of contact 5318 has been detected, and after liftoff of contact 5318, media playback continues in full-screen playback mode and media selection panel 5320 is fully displayed within user interface 5316. The user can tap one of the displayed media content items to begin playback of the content item or can swipe horizontally on media selection panel 5320 to view other related content items. In Figure 5B7, home affordance 5322 remains displayed on touch screen 112 after liftoff of contact 5318 for at least a threshold amount of time to indicate that another navigation gesture received while the home affordance is displayed will cause navigation to a different user interface.In some embodiments, if no navigation gesture or user input is detected on touch screen 112 within a threshold amount of time, home affordance 5322 (and optionally content selection panel 5320) ceases to be displayed. Another navigation gesture detected later has a similar effect as shown in Figures 5B5-5B7. In some embodiments, a tap gesture on user interface 5316 causes playback controls overlaid on user interface 5316 to be displayed, and optionally, home affordance 5322 to be displayed as well.

[0197] 5B8-5B10 show that while home affordance 5322 is displayed on touch screen 112, the device remains in a state waiting for a confirmation input for a previously detected navigation gesture. In some embodiments, a repetition of a previously performed navigation gesture or another navigation gesture causes the device to navigate to another user interface according to the newly received navigation gesture. In some embodiments, when home affordance 5322 is displayed in response to a tap gesture, the next received navigation gesture is treated as a confirmed navigation gesture, thereby causing the device to also navigate to a different user interface.

[0198] In FIG. 5B8 , while home affordance 5322 remains displayed after an initial navigation gesture (e.g., an upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touchscreen by contact 5318) is detected, contact 5324 is detected near the bottom edge region of touchscreen 112. In response to detecting contact 5324 and the upward movement of contact 5324, the device determines that a confirmation input has been detected and responds to the current navigation gesture by displaying multiple application views, e.g., application view 5330 for recently opened applications, application view 5326 for recently opened applications, and application view 5328 for a control panel user interface, as shown in FIG. 5B9 . In some embodiments, application views 5330, 5326, and 5328 are scaled, persisted, or state images of the corresponding user interfaces displayed in a landscape orientation. The multiple application views are dragged upward, decreasing in size in accordance with the upward movement of contact 5324. 5B9 also shows that multiple application views are overlaid on a blurred home screen user interface 5332, which optionally displays application start icons in a landscape orientation. In FIG. 5B10, after lift-off of contact 5324 is detected and the home gesture criteria are met (e.g., contact 5324 was above three-quarters of the height of the screen when lift-off of contact 5324 was detected), the device displays home screen user interface 5334 in a landscape orientation.

[0199] 5B11-5B33 show another example application having a protected state. In particular, a map application has an interactive map display mode and a navigation mode. When the map application is in navigation mode, the application is protected from the effects of standard navigation gestures, requires a confirmation input after detecting an initial navigation gesture, or requires an initial extended navigation gesture to another user interface.

[0200] 5B11, the map application is operating in a first mode (e.g., an alternative map display mode). The map application's user interface 5336 in the interactive map display mode includes multiple control areas, including a map display area (e.g., a window for displaying a map), a destination display area (e.g., affordances for displaying a currently selected destination, an editing user interface for setting start and end locations for a direction request, and an affordance for canceling the currently displayed destination), a direction control area (e.g., including affordances for activating a navigation mode for guided navigation to a selected destination), a transportation selection area (e.g., affordances for selecting a transportation mode for directions), etc. The user interface 5336 is designed to facilitate user interaction with the user interface while displaying the map (e.g., composing a direction request, invoking navigation mode after the direction request is composed, etc.). In FIG. 5B11, home affordance 5002 is overlaid on user interface 5336 to indicate the edge region of touch screen 112 from which, in some circumstances, a navigation gesture is initiated (e.g., an upward swipe gesture that causes the display of an application switcher user interface or a home screen display user interface, or a sideways swipe that causes the display of a control panel user interface or a recently opened applications user interface).

[0201] 5B11-5B13 show that when a navigation gesture that meets the home display criteria is detected, the device stops displaying user interface 5336 after the navigation gesture ends and displays home screen user interface 5314. In FIG. 5B11, contact 5338 is detected within a bottom edge region of touch screen 112 (e.g., the region visually indicated by home affordance 5002). In FIG. 5B12, following upward movement of contact 5338, user interface 5336 shrinks and becomes application view 5340 (e.g., a scaled, persistent, or static image of user interface 5336) that is dragged by contact 5338. When the application switcher display criteria are met and before lift-off of contact 5338 is detected, a control panel view 5306 corresponding to the control panel user interface and an application view 5344 corresponding to a recently opened application (e.g., a browser application) are displayed on either side of application view 5340, with the views moving and shrinking together as contact 5338 moves upward across touch screen 112. Views 5344, 5340, and 5306 are overlaid on top of a blurred version of the home screen user interface (e.g., blurred home screen 5310). In FIG. 5B13, after lift-off of contact 5338 is detected and the home display criteria are met (e.g., contact 5338 moves beyond a threshold position (e.g., three-quarters of the screen height) on touch screen 112), home screen user interface 5314 is displayed on touch screen 112.

[0202] 5B14-5B25 illustrate alternative scenarios to those illustrated in FIGS. 5B11-5B13. In FIGS. 5B14-5B25, a map application is operating in navigation mode. Intentional navigation to other user interfaces while the map application is in navigation mode is relatively rare, and accidental navigation to other user interfaces is considered disruptive by many users. As such, a map application operating in navigation mode is defined as an application that is currently "protected" from the effects of normal navigation gestures (e.g., gestures that navigate to the home screen user interface, the application switcher user interface, recently opened applications, or the control panel user interface).

[0203] 5B14, full-screen user interface 5346 includes a zoomed view of the user's current location in a map, a banner indicating the next direction, and a control area 5350 that displays a trip summary (e.g., estimated arrival time, estimated duration of the trip, etc.) and an affordance for exiting navigation mode (e.g., an "Exit" button). Home affordance 5002 is not visible on user interface 5346.

[0204] 5B14-5B16 show that while the map application is in navigation mode, contact 5348 is detected on a bottom edge region of touch screen 112 near affordance 5342 in control region 5350 of user interface 5346. In FIG. 5B15, following upward movement of contact 5348, control region 5350 is raised from the bottom of the display to reveal additional control options, such as icons for searching nearby gas stations, lunch places, coffee shops, etc. In FIG. 5B15, user interface 5346 optionally remains displayed during upward movement of contact 5348 (e.g., as a blurred version 5346' of full-screen user interface 5346). Navigation optionally continues during movement of contact 5348. In FIG. 5B16, lift-off of contact 5348 has been detected, and after lift-off of contact 5348, the map application remains in navigation mode and control area 5350 is fully displayed within user interface 5346′ (e.g., additional control options are displayed within control area 5350, including an affordance for displaying an overview of the route on the map, an affordance for displaying direction details, and an affordance for displaying audio settings for navigation mode).

[0205] 5B17-5B19 show another scenario alternative to the scenarios shown in FIGS. 5B11-5B13 and 5B14-5B16. In FIG. 5B17, while a map application is operating in navigation mode and the Home affordances are not displayed on touch screen 112, the device detects contact 5352 near the bottom edge of touch screen 112 (e.g., as opposed to near affordance 5342 above the bottom edge area). In FIG. 5B18, upward movement of contact 5352 is detected, and instead of displaying the application view as shown in FIG. 5B12, full-screen user interface 5346 remains displayed, and Home affordance 5002 is optionally displayed in response to the upward movement of contact 5352. In some embodiments, other inputs, such as a tap or a short upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touch screen, optionally cause the Home affordances to also be displayed. In FIG. 5B19, lift-off of contact 5352 is detected, and while the map application remains in navigation mode, full-screen user interface 5346 is displayed on the touchscreen, and home affordances 5002 are overlaid on full-screen user interface 5346.

[0206] 5B20-5B22 show that after liftoff of contact 5352, contact 5354 is detected near affordance 5342 (as shown in FIG. 5B20) while home affordance 5002 is still displayed on the touchscreen (e.g., before a threshold amount of time has elapsed). In FIG. 5B21, following the upward movement of contact 5354, control region 5350 is lifted off the bottom of touchscreen 112 onto a blurred version of user interface 5346 (e.g., shown as user interface 5346′). In FIG. 5B22, liftoff of contact 5354 has been detected, and control region 5350 is fully displayed on the blurred version of user interface 5346.

[0207] 5B23-5B25 show that after liftoff of contact 5352 (in FIG. 5B19), home affordance 5002 remains displayed for at least a threshold amount of time to indicate that another navigation gesture received while the home affordance is displayed will cause navigation to a different user interface. In some embodiments, if no navigation gesture or user input is detected on touch screen 112 within the threshold amount of time, home affordance 5002 ceases to be displayed. Another navigation gesture detected later has a similar effect as shown in FIGS. 5B17-5B19.

[0208] 5B23, home affordance 5002 is displayed on touch screen 112 while the device remains in a state waiting for a confirmation input for a previously detected navigation gesture. In some embodiments, a repetition of a previously performed navigation gesture or another navigation gesture causes the device to navigate to another user interface according to the newly received navigation gesture. In some embodiments, when home affordance 5002 is displayed in response to a tap gesture, the next received navigation gesture is treated as a confirmed navigation gesture, thereby causing the device to also navigate to a different user interface.

[0209] In FIG. 5B23, while home affordance 5002 remains displayed after an initial navigation gesture (e.g., an upward swipe from the bottom edge of the touchscreen by contact 5352 in FIGS. 5B17-5B19) is detected, contact 5356 is detected near the bottom edge region of touchscreen 112. In response to detecting contact 5356 and the upward movement of contact 5356, the device determines that a confirmation input has been detected and responds to the current navigation gesture by displaying multiple application views, such as application view 5344 for recently opened applications, application view 5358 for recently opened applications, and application view 5306 for a control panel user interface, as shown in FIG. 5B24, for example. In some embodiments, application views 5344, 5358, and 5306 are scaled, persisted, or state images of the corresponding user interfaces. The multiple application views are dragged upward, decreasing in size, in accordance with the upward movement of contact 5356. 5B24 also shows multiple application views, which are a blurred version of the home screen 5324, overlaid on top of the blurred home screen user interface 5310, including multiple application start icons. In FIG. 5B25, after lift-off of contact 5356 is detected and the home gesture criteria are met (e.g., contact 5356 was above three-quarters of the height of the screen when lift-off of contact 5356 was detected), the device displays home screen user interface 5314.

[0210] Figures 5B26-5B29 illustrate alternative scenarios to those shown in Figures 5B11-5B13, 5B14-5B16, and 5B17-5B25, respectively. In Figures 5B26-5B29, an extended navigation gesture is first detected, and the extended navigation gesture disables protection on a map application that is in navigation mode, thereby causing navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a home screen user interface).

[0211] In Figure 5B26, while the map application is operating in navigation mode, full-screen user interface 5346 is displayed and home affordances are not visible on the display. Contact 5360 is detected near the bottom edge region of touchscreen 112 at time t = t0. In Figure 5B27, contact 5360 is maintained at an initial touch-down position near the bottom edge of the touchscreen for at least a threshold amount of time T and less than a threshold movement amount (e.g., an initial touch-hold requirement is satisfied by contact 5360). In response to detecting that contact 5360 satisfies the touch-hold requirement, home affordance 5002 is displayed near the bottom edge region of the touchscreen to indicate that the touch-hold requirement has been satisfied and that the initial portion of an extended navigation gesture has been detected. In Figure 5B28, upward movement of contact 5360 is detected, and the device recognizes the input by contact 5360 as an extended navigation gesture, and in response to detecting the extended navigation gesture, the device displays multiple application views 5344, 5358, and 5306 in accordance with the upward movement of contact 5360. In Figure 5B29, lift-off of contact 5360 has been detected, and because the home display criteria are met (e.g., contact 5360 has reached above three-quarters of the height of the screen), the device displays home screen user interface 5314 on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the navigation mode continues in the background, for example, a floating banner indicating the next direction is optionally displayed at the top of the display, or a small directional indicator is optionally displayed in the upper left corner of the display.

[0212] Figures 5B30-5B33 illustrate alternative scenarios to those shown in Figures 5B11-5B13, 5B14-5B16, and 5B17-5B25, respectively. In Figures 5B30-5B33, an extended navigation gesture is first detected, and the extended navigation gesture disables protection on a map application that is in navigation mode, thereby causing navigation to a different user interface (e.g., a home screen user interface).

[0213] In FIG. 5B30, while a map application is operating in navigation mode, a full-screen user interface 5346 is displayed and home affordances are not visible on the display. In FIG. 5B31, a contact 5362 having a first intensity is detected near the bottom edge region of the touch screen 112. The intensity of the contact 5362 is greater than or equal to a threshold intensity IT L (e.g., an initial intensity requirement is met by contact 5362). In response to detecting that contact 5362 meets the intensity requirement, the device determines that the initial portion of an extended navigation gesture has been detected. In FIG. 5B32, an upward movement of contact 5362 is detected, and the device recognizes the input by contact 5362 as an extended navigation gesture, and in response to detecting the extended navigation gesture, the device displays multiple application views 5344, 5358, and 5306 in accordance with the upward movement of contact 5362. In FIG. 5B33, lift-off of contact 5362 has been detected, and the home display criteria have been met (e.g., contact 5362 has reached above three-quarters of the height of the screen), so the device displays home screen user interface 5314 on the touchscreen. In some embodiments (not shown), the navigation mode continues in the background; for example, a floating banner indicating the next direction is optionally displayed at the top of the display, or a small directional indicator is optionally displayed in the upper left corner of the display.

[0214] 5C1-5C45 show exemplary user interfaces for displaying a control panel user interface (sometimes referred to as a “control center”) and displaying enlarged regions of the control panel user interface or activating controls in response to different inputs, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces in those figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 11A-11E. For ease of explanation, some of the embodiments are discussed with reference to operations performed on a device having touch-sensitive display system 112. In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., the face centroid of each contact or a point associated with each contact), or the face centroid of two or more contacts detected on touch-sensitive display system 112. However, similar operations, along with a focus selector, are optionally performed on a device having display 450 and a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the user interface shown in the figures on display 450.

[0215] 5C1-5C12 show various ways to access the control panel user interface from other user interfaces.

[0216] 5C1-5C3 illustrate accessing a control panel user interface from a lock screen. FIG. 5C1 illustrates displaying lock screen user interface 5502. In response to various inputs (e.g., in FIG. 5C2), device 100 displays control panel user interface 5504 (e.g., in FIG. 5C3) having home affordances 5506. As shown in FIG. 5C2, various gestures can be used to access control panel user interface 5504, including a press input on the bottom edge of touch screen 112 with contact 5507 exceeding an intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressure intensity threshold ITL), a horizontal swipe gesture on the bottom edge of touch screen 112 with contact 5508, an up and left arc gesture with contact 5509, and a tap gesture on a status indicator with contact 5510. Although not shown, in some embodiments, a horizontal swipe gesture in another direction (as opposed to a horizontal swipe gesture with contact 5508), an up and right arc gesture (as opposed to an up and left arc gesture with contact 5509), or a tap gesture on another surface of device 100 (as opposed to a tap gesture with contact 5510) is used to access control panel user interface 5504. In some embodiments, when control panel user interface 5504 is accessed from a lock screen (e.g., lock screen user interface 5502), the current date and time (displayed in a centered position on lock screen user interface 5502 in FIG. 5C2) is displayed in a shifted position on control panel user interface 5504, as shown in FIG. 5C3.

[0217] 5C4-5C6 illustrate accessing the control panel user interface from the home screen. FIG. 5C4 illustrates displaying home screen user interface 5512. In response to various inputs (e.g., in FIG. 5C5), device 100 displays control panel user interface 5518 (e.g., in FIG. 5C6). As shown in FIG. 5C5, an intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressure intensity threshold IT L), a horizontal swipe gesture on the bottom edge of touch screen 112 with contact 5514, an up and left arc gesture with contact 5515, and a tap gesture on a status indicator with contact 5516. Although not shown, in some embodiments, a horizontal swipe gesture in other directions (opposite to the horizontal swipe gesture with contact 5514), an up and right arc gesture (opposite to the up and left arc gesture with contact 5515), or a tap gesture on another side of device 100 (opposite to the tap gesture with contact 5516) is used to access control panel user interface 5518. In some embodiments, when the control panel user interface 5518 is accessed from a home screen (e.g., the home screen user interface 5512) (and not from a lock screen user interface), the current date and time (displayed on the control panel user interface 5504, as shown in FIG. 5C3) is not displayed on the control panel user interface 5518, as shown in FIG. 5C6.

[0218] 5C7-5C9 illustrate accessing a control panel user interface from an application. FIG. 5C7 illustrates displaying application user interface 5520 (e.g., for a messaging application). In response to various inputs (e.g., in FIG. 5C8), device 100 displays control panel user interface 5518 (e.g., in FIG. 5C9). As shown in FIG. 5C8, an intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressure intensity threshold IT L), a horizontal swipe gesture on the bottom edge of the touch screen 112 with contact 5522, an up and left arc gesture with contact 5523, and a tap gesture on a status indicator with contact 5524. Although not shown, in some embodiments, a horizontal swipe gesture in other directions (opposite to the horizontal swipe gesture with contact 5522), an up and right arc gesture (opposite to the up and left arc with contact 5523), or a tap gesture on another side of device 100 (opposite to the tap gesture with contact 5524) is used to access the control panel user interface 5518. In some embodiments, when the control panel user interface 5518 is accessed from an application (e.g., application interface 5520) (not from the lock screen user interface), the expanded current date and time (displayed on the control panel user interface 5504, as shown in FIG. 5C3) is not displayed on the control panel user interface 5518, as shown in FIG. 5C9.

[0219] 5C10-5C12 illustrate accessing a control panel user interface from a multitasking user interface. FIG. 5C10 illustrates displaying multitasking user interface 5526, which includes a representation of control panel user interface 5518. In response to various inputs (e.g., in FIG. 5C11), device 100 displays control panel user interface 5518 (e.g., in FIG. 5C12). As shown in FIG. 5C11, various gestures are used to access control panel user interface 5518, including a tap input on the representation of control panel user interface 5518 with contact 5527, a horizontal swipe gesture on the representation of control panel user interface 5518 with contact 5528, and a tap gesture on a status indicator with contact 5529. Although not shown, in some embodiments, a horizontal swipe gesture in another direction (as opposed to a horizontal swipe gesture with contact 5528) or a tap gesture on another surface of device 100 (as opposed to a tap gesture with contact 5529) is used to access control panel user interface 5518. In some embodiments, when control panel user interface 5518 is accessed from a multitasking user interface source (e.g., multitasking user interface 5526) (and not from a lock screen user interface), the enlarged current date and time (displayed on control panel user interface 5504, as shown in FIG. 5C3) is not displayed on control panel user interface 5518, as shown in FIG. 5C12.

[0220] 5C13-5C16 illustrate displaying a control panel user interface (e.g., control panel user interface 5518, FIG. 5C13) and, in response to a press input on an area of ​​the control panel user interface (e.g., on Wi-Fi icon 5546 in connectivity module 5540), displaying an expanded view of the area (e.g., expanded connectivity module 5550, FIG. 5C15). FIG. 5C13 illustrates displaying control panel user interface 5518 including one or more control areas, each including a respective plurality of controls for controlling a corresponding function of device 100. As shown in FIG. 5C13, control panel user interface 5518 includes connectivity module 5540 including a plurality of controls (e.g., airplane mode icon 5542, cellular data icon 5544, Wi-Fi icon 5546, and Bluetooth icon 5548). 5C14-5C15, device 100 detects an input on connectivity module 5540, such as a press gesture by contact 5532, and in response, device 100 displays an expanded view of connectivity module 5540 (e.g., expanded connectivity module 5550, FIG. 5C15). As shown in FIG. 5C14, when the press gesture by contact 5532-a exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), the connectivity module 5540 increases in size and the remainder of the control panel user interface 5518 begins to blur. As the intensity of the pressure gesture by contact 5532-b continues to increase and crosses a second intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressure intensity threshold IT L), the control area expands (e.g., "pops open") to display the additional controls within the expanded connectivity module 5550, and the remainder of the control panel user interface 5518 is further blurred. As shown in FIGS. 5C15-5C16, the expanded connectivity module 5550 includes additional controls (e.g., AirDrop icon 5552 and personal hotspot icon 5554) as well as additional information (e.g., the state of each control) that are not shown within the connectivity module 5540 (e.g., in FIG. 5C13). In some embodiments, device 100 displays an expanded view of the control area (e.g., expanded connectivity module 5550, FIG. 5C15) in response to a touch-and-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact 5532) (e.g., based on the duration of the contact but not the intensity of the contact). As shown in FIG. 5C16, when contact 5532 lifts off, the expanded connectivity module 5550 remains displayed.

[0221] 5C17-5C18, device 100 detects input on Wi-Fi icon 5546, such as a tap gesture by contact 5534, and in response, toggles Wi-Fi control from OFF to ON (and changes the state of Wi-Fi control from "Off" to "AppleWiFi") and changes the appearance (e.g., from light to dark) of Wi-Fi icon 5546. As shown in FIG. 5C17, depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by contact 5534, the size of Wi-Fi icon 5546 increases in proportion to the change in the intensity of the contact (e.g., a tap gesture with a lower intensity increases the size by a smaller amount, and a tap gesture with a higher intensity increases the size by a larger amount), indicating that Wi-Fi icon 5546 is sensitive to intensity-based input.

[0222] 5C19-5C20, device 100 detects input outside of enlarged connectivity module 5550, such as a tap gesture with contact 5536, and in response, releases enlarged connectivity module 5550 and displays control panel user interface 5518 (e.g., in FIG. 5C20). As shown in FIG. 5C20, Wi-Fi icon 5546 is now dimmed, indicating that Wi-Fi control is on.

[0223] 5C21-5C22, device 100 detects input on Wi-Fi icon 5546, such as a tap gesture by contact 5556, and in response, toggles Wi-Fi control from ON to OFF and changes the appearance of Wi-Fi icon 5546 (e.g., from dark to light). As shown in FIG. 5C21, in response to the intensity of the tap gesture by contact 5556, connectivity module 5540 increases in size according to the rate at which the intensity of the contact changes. For example, connectivity module 5540 increases in size by a smaller amount in response to a tap gesture with a smaller intensity, as shown in FIG. 5C21, and connectivity module 5540 increases in size by a larger amount in response to a tap gesture with a larger intensity, as shown in FIG. 5C23. The tap gestures shown in FIGS. 5C21 and 5C23 both exceed the hint intensity threshold IT H , but for hard (and fast) taps (e.g., the hint intensity threshold IT H ) is still recognized as a tap gesture by device 100, and there is no requirement that the intensity of the tap gesture remain below a particular intensity threshold. For example, in some embodiments, the intensity of the tap gesture may be greater than or equal to a hint intensity threshold IT H Above the light pressure intensity threshold IT L Above or deep pressure intensity threshold IT D , but as long as the duration of the gesture is short enough to qualify as a tap, it will still be recognized as a tap gesture.

[0224] 5C23-5C24, device 100 detects input on Bluetooth icon 5548, such as a tap gesture by contact 5558, and in response, toggles the Bluetooth control from OFF to ON and changes the appearance of Bluetooth icon 5548 (e.g., from light to dark). As shown in FIG. 5C23, depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by contact 5558, the size of connectivity module 5540 increases according to the rate at which the intensity of the contact changes. For example, because the intensity of contact 5558 (e.g., in FIG. 5C23) is greater than the intensity of contact 5556 (e.g., in FIG. 5C21), the size of connectivity module 5540 is larger in FIG. 5C23 compared to the size of connectivity module 5540 in FIG. 5C21.

[0225] 5C25-5C27 illustrate displaying a control panel user interface (e.g., user interface 5518, FIG. 5C24) and, in response to a press input on an area of ​​the control panel user interface (e.g., in an area within connectivity module 5540 that is not occupied by any control), displaying an enlarged view of the area (e.g., enlarged connectivity module 5550, FIG. 5C26). In FIGS. 5C25-5C26, device 100 detects an input on connectivity module 5540, such as a press gesture with contact 5560, and, in response, device 100 displays an enlarged view of connectivity module 5540 (e.g., enlarged connectivity module 5550, FIG. 5C26). As shown in FIG. 5C25, when the press gesture with contact 5560-a exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), the size of the connectivity module 5540 increases and the remainder of the control panel user interface 5518 begins to blur. As the intensity of the pressure gesture by contact 5560-b continues to increase and crosses a second intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressure intensity threshold IT L), the control area expands (e.g., "pops open") to display additional controls within the expanded connectivity module 5550, and the remainder of the control panel user interface 5518 is further blurred. In some embodiments, device 100 displays an expanded view of the control area (e.g., expanded connectivity module 5550, FIG. 5C26) in response to a touch-and-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact 5560) (e.g., based on the length of time of the contact but not the intensity of the contact). When contact 5560 lifts off, as shown in FIG. 5C27, the expanded connectivity module 5550 remains displayed.

[0226] 5C28-5C29, device 100 detects input on Wi-Fi icon 5546, such as a tap gesture by contact 5562, and accordingly toggles Wi-Fi control from OFF to ON (and changes the state of Wi-Fi control from "Off" to "AppleWiFi") and changes the appearance of Wi-Fi icon 5546 (e.g., from light to dark). As shown in FIG. 5C28, depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by contact 5562, the size of Wi-Fi icon 5546 increases in proportion to the change in the intensity of the contact (e.g., a tap gesture with a lower intensity increases the size by a smaller amount, and a tap gesture with a higher intensity increases the size by a larger amount), indicating that Wi-Fi icon 5546 is sensitive to intensity-based input. In some embodiments, both Wi-Fi and Bluetooth must be ON for AirDrop control to be in an ON state. As shown in FIG. 5C29, when Wi-Fi is toggled on again (so both Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are in the ON state), AirDrop is also turned on again (and the state changes from "Receive Off" to "Contact Only").

[0227] 5C29-5C32 illustrate displaying an expanded view of an area from a control panel user interface (e.g., expanded connectivity module 5550, FIG. 5C29) and, in response to a press input on an expandable control icon (e.g., Wi-Fi icon 5546), displaying an expanded view of the expandable control (e.g., expanded Wi-Fi control 5566, FIG. 5C31). In FIGS. 5C30-5C31, device 100 detects input on Wi-Fi icon 5546, such as a press gesture by contact 5564, and, in response, device 100 displays an expanded view of the Wi-Fi control (e.g., expanded Wi-Fi control 5566, FIG. 5C31). As shown in FIG. 5C30, when the press gesture by contact 5564-a exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), Wi-Fi icon 5546 increases in size (optionally, not shown here, the remainder of enlarged connectivity module 5550 begins to blur). As the intensity of the pressure gesture by contact 5564-b continues to increase and crosses a second intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressure intensity threshold IT L), the control icon expands (e.g., "pops open") to display an expanded view of the controls within expanded Wi-Fi control 5566 (and expanded connectivity module 5550 is blurred, whereas in FIG. 5C31 expanded connectivity module 5550 is completely obscured by expanded Wi-Fi control 5566). As shown in FIGS. 5C31-5C32, expanded Wi-Fi control 5566 includes additional information and / or controls (e.g., other available Wi-Fi connections, signal strength, and other information for accessing Wi-Fi settings) that are not shown in expanded connectivity module 5550 (e.g., in FIG. 5C29). In some embodiments, device 100 displays an expanded view of the control area (e.g., expanded Wi-Fi control 5566) in response to a touch-and-hold input (e.g., a long press by contact 5564) (e.g., based on the length of time of the contact but not the intensity of the contact). As shown in FIG. 5C32, when contact 5564 is lifted off, expanded Wi-FI control 5566 remains visible.

[0228] In Figures 5C33-5C34, device 100 detects input outside of extended Wi-Fi control 5566, such as a tap gesture with contact 5568, and in response, releases extended Wi-Fi control 5566 and displays extended connectivity module 5550 (e.g., in Figure 5C34).

[0229] 5C35-5C36, device 100 detects input on Wi-Fi icon 5546, such as a tap gesture by contact 5570, and accordingly toggles Wi-Fi control from ON to OFF (and changes the state of Wi-Fi control from "AppleWiFi" to "Off") and changes the appearance of Wi-Fi icon 5546 (e.g., from dark to light). As shown in FIG. 5C35, depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by contact 5570, the size of Wi-Fi icon 5546 increases in proportion to the change in the intensity of the contact (e.g., a tap gesture with a lower intensity increases the size by a smaller amount, and a tap gesture with a higher intensity increases the size by a larger amount), indicating that Wi-Fi icon 5546 is sensitive to intensity-based input. In some embodiments, both Wi-Fi and Bluetooth must be ON for AirDrop control to be in an ON state. As shown in FIG. 5C36, when Wi-Fi is toggled to the OFF state, AirDrop also turns off (and the state changes from "contact only" to "receive off").

[0230] 5C37-5C38, device 100 detects input on Bluetooth icon 5548, such as a tap gesture by contact 5572, and in response, toggles Bluetooth control from ON to OFF (and changes the state of the Bluetooth control from "On" to "Off") and changes the appearance (e.g., from dark to light) of Bluetooth icon 5548. As shown in FIG. 5C37, depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by contact 5572, the size of Bluetooth icon 5548 increases in proportion to the rate at which the intensity of the contact changes (e.g., a tap gesture with a smaller intensity increases the size by a smaller amount, and a tap gesture with a greater intensity increases the size by a larger amount), indicating that Bluetooth 5548 is sensitive to intensity-based input.

[0231] 5C39-5C40, device 100 detects input outside of enlarged connectivity module 5550, such as a tap gesture by contact 5574, and in response, releases enlarged connectivity module 5550 and displays control panel user interface 5518 (e.g., in FIG. 5C40). Note that any changes in the appearance of any controls in enlarged connectivity module 5550 are saved to connectivity module 5540 of control panel user interface 5518 when enlarged connectivity module 5550 is released. For example, because the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth controls were turned off while enlarged connectivity module 5550 was displayed (e.g., in FIGS. 5C35-5C38), both Wi-Fi icon 5546 and Bluetooth icon 5548 in connectivity module 5540 (e.g., in FIG. 5C40) are illuminated to indicate that the Wi-Fi control is off and the Bluetooth control is off.

[0232] 5C41-5C45 show additional expanded views of expandable controls (eg, Bluetooth control, AirDrop control, and personal hotspot control) from the expanded connectivity module 5550 (eg, in FIG. 5C41).

[0233] 5C42-5C43, device 100 detects input on Bluetooth icon 5548, such as a press gesture by contact 5576, and in response, device 100 displays an expanded view of the Bluetooth controls (e.g., expanded Bluetooth controls 5580, FIG. 5C43). As shown in FIG. 5C42, when the press gesture by contact 5576-a exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), the size of Bluetooth icon 5548 increases (optionally, not shown here, the remainder of enlarged connectivity module 5550 begins to blur). As the intensity of the press gesture by contact 5576-b continues to increase and crosses a second intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold IT L), the control icon expands (e.g., "pops open") to display an expanded view of the controls within expanded Bluetooth icon 5580 (and expanded connectivity module 5550 is blurred). As shown in FIG. 5C43, expanded Bluetooth controls 5580 include additional information and / or controls (e.g., number of Bluetooth connections, battery life for each Bluetooth device, access to Bluetooth settings, etc.) not shown in expanded connectivity module 5550 (e.g., in FIG. 5C41). In some embodiments, device 100 displays the expanded view of the controls (e.g., expanded Bluetooth controls 5580) in response to a touch-and-hold input (e.g., a long press by contact 5576) (e.g., based on the length of time of the contact but not the intensity of the contact).

[0234] 5C42 and 5C44, device 100 detects input on AirDrop icon 5552, such as a press gesture by contact 5577, and in response, device 100 displays an expanded view of the AirDrop control (e.g., expanded AirDrop control 5582, FIG. 5C44). As shown in FIG. 5C42, when the press gesture by contact 5577-a exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), the size of AirDrop icon 5552 increases (optionally, not shown here, the remainder of enlarged persistence module 5550 begins to blur). As the intensity of the pressure gesture by contact 5577-b continues to increase and crosses a second intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressure intensity threshold IT L), the control area expands (e.g., "pops open") to display an expanded view of the controls within expanded AirDrop control 5582 (and expanded connectivity module 5550 is blurred). As shown in FIG. 5C44, expanded AirDrop control 5582 includes additional information and controls (e.g., options to select between "Receive Off," "Contact Only," and "Everyone," etc.) that are not shown in expanded connectivity module 5550 (e.g., in FIG. 5C41). In some embodiments, device 100 displays the expanded view of the controls (e.g., expanded AirDrop control 5582) in response to a touch-and-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact 5577) (e.g., based on the length of time of the contact but not the intensity of the contact).

[0235] 5C42-5C45, device 100 detects input on personal hotspot 5554, such as a press gesture by contact 5578, and in response, device 100 displays an expanded view of the personal hotspot controls (e.g., expanded personal hotspot controls 5584, FIG. 5C45). As shown in FIG. 5C42, when the press gesture by contact 5578-a exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), the size of personal hotspot icon 5554 increases (optionally, not shown here, the remainder of enlarged connectivity module 5550 begins to blur). As the intensity of the pressure gesture by contact 5578-b continues to increase and crosses a second intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressure intensity threshold IT L), the control icon expands (e.g., "pops open") to display an expanded view of the control within expanded personal hotspot control 5584 (and expanded connectivity module 5550 is blurred). As shown in FIG. 5C45, expanded personal hotspot control 5584 includes additional information and / or controls (e.g., Wi-Fi password, access to personal hotspot settings, etc.) that are not shown in expanded connectivity module 5550 (e.g., in FIG. 5C41). In some embodiments, device 100 displays the expanded view of the control (e.g., expanded personal hotspot control 5584) in response to a touch and hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact 5578) (e.g., based on the length of time of the contact but not the intensity of the contact).

[0236] 5D1-5D42 show exemplary user interfaces for displaying and editing a control panel user interface (sometimes referred to as a “control center”), according to some embodiments. The user interfaces in those figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 12A-12I. For ease of explanation, some of the embodiments are discussed with reference to operations performed on a device having touch-sensitive display system 112. In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., the face center of each contact or a point associated with each contact), or the face center of two or more contacts detected on touch-sensitive display system 112. However, similar operations, along with a focus selector, are optionally performed on a device having display 450 and a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the user interface shown in the figures on display 450.

[0237] 5D1 illustrates displaying a control panel user interface 5518 including one or more control affordances. As shown in FIG. 5D1, the control panel user interface 5518 includes one or more user-configurable control affordances including an airplane mode icon 5542, a cellular data icon 5544, a Wi-Fi icon 5546, a Bluetooth icon 5548, an audio control 5622, a bearing lock icon 5624, a do not disturb icon 5626, an AirPlay® icon 5628, a brightness control 5630, a volume control 5632, as well as a flashlight icon 5600, a timer icon 5602, a calculator icon 5604, and a camera icon 5606. In some embodiments, one or more of the control affordances on the control panel user interface 5518 are not user-configurable (e.g., are optionally not removed or rearranged by a user of device 100). For example, in some embodiments, control affordances such as airplane mode icon 5542, cellular data icon 5544, Wi-Fi icon 5546, Bluetooth icon 5548, audio control 5622, orientation lock icon 5624, do not disturb icon 5626, airplane mode Play icon 5628, brightness control 5630, and volume control 5632 are not user-configurable. In some embodiments, one or more of the control affordances on control panel user interface 5518 are user-configurable (e.g., allowed by the device to be added, removed, or rearranged by a user of device 100). For example, in some embodiments, control affordances such as flashlight icon 5600, timer icon 5602, calculator icon 5604, and camera icon 5606 are user-configurable.

[0238] 5D2-5D7 illustrate navigating from a control panel user interface (e.g., user interface 5518, FIG. 5D2) to a control panel settings user interface (e.g., control panel settings user interface 5648, FIG. 5D7). In FIGS. 5D2-5D3, device 100 detects input on home affordance 5506, such as a swipe up gesture with contact 5640, and in response, displays a home screen (e.g., home screen user interface 5512, FIG. 5D3). In FIGS. 5D4-5D5, device 100 detects input on settings icon 446, such as a tap gesture with contact 5642, and in response, displays a settings user interface (e.g., settings user interface 5644, FIG. 5D5). 5D6-5D7, device 100 detects input selecting a control panel setting, such as a tap gesture with contact 5646, and in response, displays a control panel setting user interface (e.g., control panel setting user interface 5648, FIG. 5D7). As shown in FIG. 5D7, control panel setting user interface 5648 displays a set of selected modules (e.g., flashlight, timer, calculator, and camera) currently selected for display within control panel user interface 5518 (e.g., in FIG. 5D2), as well as a set of zero or more additional modules (e.g., unselected) not currently included in control panel user interface 5518 but available for inclusion in configurable portion(s) of control panel user interface 5518. As in the example of FIG. 5D7, if there are more modules than can be displayed within an initial single screen of control panel setting user interface 5648, the list of modules is scrollable to allow display of additional modules (e.g., additional modules in a "More Modules" list). In FIG. 5D7, the "+" and "-" selection controls are used to add or remove modules, respectively, from the control panel user interface 5518.Although not shown here, in some embodiments, other methods are used to add or remove modules (e.g., an ON / OFF toggle affordance for each module, dragging a module from the "More Modules" list to the "Selected Modules" list to add a module, dragging a module from the "Selected Modules" list to the "More Modules" list to remove a module, etc.).

[0239] 5D8-5D11 illustrate examples of adding control affordances to a control panel user interface. In FIGS. 5D8-5D9, device 100 detects input on a "+" selection control for a home module, such as a tap gesture with contact 5650, and in response, moves the home module from the "More Modules" list to the "Selected Modules" list (e.g., as shown in FIG. 5D9). In FIGS. 5D10-5D11, device 100 detects input on a "Done" icon in control panel settings user interface 5648, such as a tap gesture with contact 5652, and in response, displays control panel user interface 5518. While the example in FIG. 5D11 uses the "Done" icon to return to control panel user interface 5518, in some embodiments, the control panel user interface optionally displays the control affordance in other ways (e.g., based on an intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressure intensity threshold IT )), as described above with respect to FIGS. 5C1-5C12. L 5D11 , where the home module has been selected for display, and a home icon 5608 is displayed within the control panel user interface 5518.

[0240] FIG. 5D12 shows the control panel user interface 5518 after multiple modules have been selected (eg, in a manner similar to that described above with respect to FIGS. 5D8-5D11). As shown in FIG. 5D12, control panel user interface 5518 includes a set of non-user-configurable control affordances (e.g., airplane mode icon 5542, cellular data icon 5544, Wi-Fi icon 5546, Bluetooth icon 5548, audio control 5622, orientation lock icon 5624, do not disturb icon 5626, AirPlay icon 5628, brightness control 5630, and volume control 5632), as well as one or more user-configurable control affordances including a flashlight icon 5600, a timer icon 5602, a calculator icon 5604, a camera icon 5606, a home icon 5608, an accessibility icon 5610, an Apple TV remote icon 5612, a type size icon 5614, a low power mode icon 5616, a CarPlay® icon 5618, and a hearing aid icon 5620.

[0241] 5D12-5D17 illustrate navigating from a control panel user interface (e.g., user interface 5518, FIG. 5D12) to a control panel settings user interface (e.g., control panel settings user interface 5648, FIG. 5D17). In FIGS. 5D12-5D13, device 100 detects input on home affordance 5506, such as a swipe up gesture with contact 5654, and in response, displays a home screen (e.g., home screen user interface 5512, FIG. 5D13). In FIGS. 5D14-5D15, device 100 detects input on settings icon 446, such as a tap gesture with contact 5656, and in response, displays a settings user interface (e.g., settings user interface 5644, FIG. 5D15). 5D16-5D17, device 100 detects input selecting a control panel setting, such as a tap gesture with contact 5658, and in response, displays a control panel setting user interface (e.g., control panel setting user interface 5648, FIG. 5D17). As shown in FIG. 5D17, control panel setting user interface 5648 displays a set of selected modules (e.g., flashlight, timer, calculator, camera, home, accessibility, Apple TV remote, etc.) currently selected for display within control panel user interface 5518 (e.g., in FIG. 5D12). As in the example of FIG. 5D17, if there are more modules than can be displayed within an initial single screen of control panel setting user interface 5648, the list of modules is scrollable to allow display of additional modules (e.g., additional modules in a "selected modules" list).

[0242] 5D18-5D22 illustrate scrolling through the "selected modules" list of control panel settings user interface 5648. FIGS. 5D18-5D19 illustrate the upward movement of contact 5660 (e.g., in a drag gesture from the location of contact 5660-a to the location of contact 5660-b). In some embodiments, the list of modules moves an amount equal to the horizontal component of the movement of contact 5660 on the display. In this example, contact 5660-a starts on the "Home" module (e.g., in FIG. 5D18), which moves up (e.g., following the movement of contact 5660) to reveal additional modules (e.g., type size, low power mode, CarPlay, and Jane's hearing aids) that were not visible within the initial single screen of control panel settings user interface 5648 of FIG. 5D18. In some embodiments, when contact 5660 lifts off, the scrollable list remains in the position to which it was scrolled, as shown in FIG. 5D20. 5D21-5D22 illustrate the downward movement of contact 5662 (e.g., in a drag gesture from the location of contact 5662-a to the location of contact 5662-b). As contact 5662 moves downward, the scrollable list is scrolled back to its original starting point.

[0243] 5D23-5D27 illustrate reordering of representations of modules in control panel settings user interface 5648 that corresponds to a similar reordering in control panel user interface 5518 (e.g., from the initial ordering of control affordances in FIG. 5D12 to the updated ordering of control affordances in FIG. 5D27). In some embodiments, each user-configurable control currently selected for display in the control panel user interface (e.g., a module in the “Selected Modules” list of the control panel settings user interface) includes a reordering control. For example, the representation of the “Apple TV Remote” module includes reordering control 5664. In FIGS. 5D24-5D25, device 100 detects input on reordering control 5664 that moves the representation of “Apple TV Remote,” such as a drag gesture with contact 5666, and in response, moves the representation of “Apple TV Remote” between the representation of “Camera” and the representation of “Home.” In some embodiments, a drag gesture on a location other than the reorder control results in scrolling the list of modules, as described above with respect to FIGS. 5D18-5D22. In FIGS. 5D26-5D27, device 100 detects input, such as a tap gesture with contact 5668, on a "Done" icon of control panel settings user interface 5648 and, in response, displays control panel user interface 5518. While the example in FIG. 5D26 uses the "Done" icon to return to control panel user interface 5518, in some embodiments, the control panel user interface optionally displays the "Done" icon in other ways (e.g., based on an intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressure intensity threshold IT)) as described above with respect to FIGS. 5C1-5C12. L5D27 , the Apple TV remote modules have now been reordered so that the Apple TV remote icon 5612 appears after the camera icon 5606 and before the home icon 5608 in the control panel user interface 5518.

[0244] 5D27-5D29 illustrate displaying a control panel user interface (e.g., user interface 5518, FIG. 5D27) and displaying an expanded view of the expandable control (e.g., expanded accessibility control 5672, FIG. 5D29) in response to a press input on an expandable control icon (e.g., accessibility icon 5610). In FIGS. 5D28-5D29, device 100 detects input on accessibility icon 5610, such as a press gesture with contact 5670, and in response, device 100 displays an expanded view of the accessibility control (e.g., expanded accessibility control 5672, FIG. 5D29). As shown in FIG. 5D28, when the press gesture with contact 5670-a exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), the size of the accessibility module 5610 increases (optionally, the remainder of the control panel user interface 5518 begins to blur). As shown in FIG. 5D29, the intensity of the press gesture by contact 5670-b continues to increase and crosses a second intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold IT L), the control icon expands (e.g., "pops open") to display an expanded view of the control within expanded accessibility module 5672, and the remainder of control panel user interface 5518 is further blurred. As shown in FIG. 5D29, expanded accessibility controls 5672 include additional information and controls (e.g., accessibility shortcuts such as "Color Filters," "Color Invert," and "Lower White Point") that are not shown in control panel user interface 5518 (e.g., in FIG. 5D27). In some embodiments, device 100 displays the expanded view of the control (e.g., expanded accessibility controls 5672) in response to a touch-and-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact 5670) (e.g., based on the length of time of the contact but not the intensity of the contact). In some embodiments, when contact 5670 lifts off, accessibility controls 5672 remain displayed.

[0245] 5D30-5D31, device 100 detects input to select an accessibility shortcut, such as a tap gesture with contact 5674 (e.g., selecting "Lower White Point"), and in response, activates "Lower White Point" and changes the appearance of the accessibility icon (e.g., from light to dark, indicating that the accessibility feature is ON).

[0246] 5D32-5D33, device 100 detects input outside of extended accessibility module 5672, such as a tap gesture with contact 5676, and in response, releases extended accessibility module 5672 and displays control panel user interface 5518 (e.g., in FIG. 5C33). As shown in FIG. 5D33, accessibility icon 5610 is now dimmed, indicating that the accessibility feature is turned on.

[0247] 5D34-5D35, device 100 detects input on accessibility icon 5610, such as a tap gesture by contact 5678, and accordingly toggles accessibility control from ON to OFF and changes the appearance of accessibility icon 5610 (e.g., from dark to light). As shown in FIG. 5D34, depending on the intensity of the tap gesture by contact 5678, the size of accessibility icon 5610 increases in proportion to the change in the intensity of the contact (e.g., a tap gesture with a lower intensity increases the size by a smaller amount, and a tap gesture with a higher intensity increases the size by a larger amount), indicating that accessibility icon 5610 is sensitive to intensity-based input. The tap gesture shown in FIG. 5D34 is based on a hint intensity threshold IT H , but for hard (and fast) taps (e.g., the hint intensity threshold IT H ) is still recognized as a tap gesture by device 100, and there is no requirement that the intensity of the tap gesture remain below a particular intensity threshold. For example, in some embodiments, the intensity of the tap gesture may be greater than or equal to a hint intensity threshold IT H Above the light pressure intensity threshold IT L Above or deep pressure intensity threshold IT D , but as long as the duration of the gesture is short enough to qualify as a tap, it will still be recognized as a tap gesture.

[0248] 5D36-5D42 show additional expanded views of expandable controls (e.g., call rejection control, type size control, hearing aid control, audio control, and Apple TV remote control) from the control panel user interface 5518 (e.g., in FIG. 5D36).

[0249] 5D36-5D37, device 100 detects input on reject call icon 5626, such as a press gesture with contact 5680, and in response, device 100 displays an expanded view of the reject call control (e.g., expanded reject call control 5690, FIG. 5D37). As shown in FIG. 5D36, when the press gesture with contact 5680-a exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), the size of the reject call icon 5626 increases (and optionally, although not shown here, the remainder of the control panel user interface 5518 begins to blur). As the intensity of the press gesture by contact 5680-b continues to increase and crosses a second intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon expands (e.g., "pops open") to display an expanded view of the controls within expanded do not disturb control 5690 (and control panel user interface 5518 is further blurred). As shown in FIG. 5D37, expanded do not disturb control 5690 includes additional information and / or controls (e.g., options for selecting the timing of the do not disturb feature, such as "manual," "on for the next time," "on for the rest of the time," "on until I leave this location," etc., accessing do not disturb settings, etc.) that are not shown in control panel user interface 5518 (e.g., in FIG. 5D36). In some embodiments, device 100 displays the expanded view of the controls (e.g., expanded do not disturb control 5690, FIG. 5D37) in response to a touch and hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact 5680) (e.g., based on the length of time of the contact but not the intensity of the contact).

[0250] 5D36-5D38, device 100 detects input on typesize 5614, such as a press gesture by contact 5682, and in response, device 100 displays an expanded view of the typesize control (e.g., expanded typesize control 5692, FIG. 5D38). As shown in FIG. 5D36, when the press gesture by contact 5682-a exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold ITH ), the size of type size icon 5614 increases (optionally, not shown here, the remainder of control panel user interface 5518 begins to blur). As the intensity of the press gesture by contact 5682-b continues to increase and crosses a second intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon expands (e.g., “pops open”) to display an expanded view of the control within expanded type size icon 5692 (and control panel user interface 5518 is further blurred). As shown in FIG. 5D38, expanded type size control 5692 includes a step slider bar for selecting between a first number of text sizes (e.g., seven different text sizes) ranging from a first minimum size to a first maximum size (e.g., 6-point text size to 24-point text size). In some embodiments, expanded type size control 5692 in FIG. 5D38 is a default step slider bar (e.g., when larger text sizes for accessibility are not enabled). In some embodiments, device 100 displays the expanded view of the control (e.g., expanded type size control 5692, FIG. 5D38) in response to a touch-and-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact 5682) (e.g., based on the length of time of the contact but not the intensity of the contact).

[0251] Alternatively, in FIGS. 5D36-5D39, when larger text size for accessibility is enabled, device 100 detects input on type size icon 5614, such as a press gesture with contact 5682, and in response, device 100 displays an expanded view of the type size control (e.g., expanded type size control 5693, FIG. 5D39). As shown in FIG. 5D36, when the press gesture with contact 5682-a exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H), the size of the type size icon 5614 increases (optionally, not shown here, the remainder of the control panel user interface 5518 begins to blur). As the intensity of the pressure gesture by contact 5682-b continues to increase and crosses a second intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressure intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon expands (e.g., "pops open") to display an expanded view of the control within expanded type size control 5693 (and control panel user interface 5518 is further blurred). As shown in FIG. 5D39, expanded type size control 5693 includes a step slider bar for selecting between a second number of text sizes (e.g., 12 different text sizes) ranging from a second minimum size to a second maximum size (e.g., 8 point text size to 60 point text size). In some embodiments, expanded type size control 5693 in FIG. 5D39 is an enlarged step slider bar provided when larger text sizes for accessibility are enabled (e.g., having more options and / or larger text size options than the default step slider bar in FIG. 5D38). In some embodiments, device 100 displays an expanded view of a control (e.g., expanded type size control 5693, FIG. 5D39) in response to a touch-and-hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact 5682) (e.g., based on the length of time of the contact but not the intensity of the contact).

[0252] 5D36-5D40, device 100 detects input on hearing aid icon 5620, such as a press gesture with contact 5684, and in response, device 100 displays an expanded view of the hearing aid controls (e.g., expanded hearing aid controls 5694, FIG. 5D40). As shown in FIG. 5D36, when the press gesture with contact 5684-a exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H), the size of the hearing aid icon 5620 increases (and optionally, although not shown here, the remainder of the control panel user interface 5518 begins to blur). As shown in FIG. 5D40, the intensity of the pressure gesture by contact 5684-b continues to increase and crosses a second intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressure intensity threshold IT L ), the control icon expands (e.g., "pops open") to display an expanded view of the controls in expanded hearing aid controls 5694 (and control panel user interface 5518 becomes further blurred). As shown in FIG. 5D40, expanded hearing aid controls 5694 include additional information and / or controls (e.g., battery indicators for each hearing aid, individual volume controls for each hearing aid, and individual bass / treble controls) that are not shown in control panel user interface 5518 (e.g., in FIG. 5D36). In some embodiments, device 100 displays the expanded view of the controls (e.g., expanded hearing aid controls 5694, FIG. 5D40) in response to a touch and hold input (e.g., a long press input by contact 5684) (e.g., based on the length of time of the contact but not the intensity of the contact).

[0253] 5D36-5D41, device 100 detects input on voice control 5622, such as a press gesture with contact 5686, and in response, device 100 displays an expanded view of the voice control (e.g., expanded voice control 5696, FIG. 5D41). As shown in FIG. 5D36, when the press gesture with contact 5686-a exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold IT H ), the size of voice control 5622 increases (and optionally, although not shown here, the remainder of control panel user interface 5518 begins to blur). As the intensity of the press gesture by contact 5686-b continues to increase and crosses a second intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold IT L), the controls expand (e.g., “pop open”) to display an expanded view of the controls in expanded audio controls 5696 (and control panel user interface 5518 is further blurred). As shown in FIG. 5D41 , expanded a...

Claims

1. In a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; detecting a first portion of input by the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface on the display; detecting a second portion of the input due to the first contact, including detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface in a first direction after detecting the first portion of the input due to the first contact; displaying, during the first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, a plurality of application views including a first application view corresponding to the first user interface of the first application and a second application view corresponding to a second user interface of a second application different from the first application; detecting a third portion of the input by the first contact while displaying the plurality of application views, including detecting lift-off of the first contact from the touch-sensitive surface after detecting the first movement of the first contact; In response to detecting the third portion of the input due to the first contact, pursuant to determining that an application switcher display criterion is satisfied, the application switcher display criterion requiring that the second portion of the input or the first application view satisfy a first movement condition, displaying the application switcher user interface including a representation of a plurality of applications for selectively activating one of the applications represented in the application switcher user interface; displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to a plurality of applications in accordance with determining that a home display criterion is satisfied, the home display criterion requiring that the second portion of the input or the first application view satisfy a second transition condition different from the first transition condition for the home display criterion to be satisfied; A method comprising:

2. The method of claim 1 , wherein the first movement condition requires that a first movement parameter of the first movement of the first contact meets a first threshold.

3. The method of claim 2 , wherein the second movement condition requires that the first movement parameter of the first movement satisfy a second threshold value that is greater than the first threshold value.

4. the first movement condition includes a criterion that is met when the first movement of the first contact corresponds to movement that exceeds a first movement threshold; 4. The method of claim 1, wherein the second movement condition comprises a criterion that is met when the first movement of the first contact corresponds to a movement above a second movement threshold that is greater than the first movement threshold.

5. the first movement condition includes a criterion that is met when the first movement of the first contact corresponds to the first range of movement between an upper movement threshold and a lower movement threshold of a first range of movement; The second movement condition is that the first movement of the first contact is: a second range of movement between an upper movement threshold and a lower movement threshold of a second range of movement, the second range of movement being less than the first range of movement and the second range of movement not overlapping with the first range of movement; or a third range of movement between an upper movement threshold and a lower movement threshold of a third range of movement, the third range of movement exceeding the first range of movement and the third range of movement not overlapping with the first range of movement; The method of any one of claims 1 to 4, comprising a criterion that is met when the

6. the first movement condition includes a criterion that is met when the first movement of the first contact corresponds to a movement greater than a fourth movement threshold; 6. The method of claim 1, wherein the second movement condition comprises a criterion that is met when the first movement of the first contact corresponds to a movement greater than a fifth movement threshold that is less than the fourth movement threshold.

7. the first movement condition includes a criterion that is met when a predefined parameter of the first application view is in a first range of values; 7. The method of claim 1, wherein the second touch movement condition comprises a criterion that is met when the predefined parameter of the first application view is in a second range of values ​​that is different from the first range of values.

8. the first movement condition includes a criterion that is met when the first movement of the first contact includes a predefined break in the first contact; The method of any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the second movement condition comprises a criterion that is met when the first movement of the first contact does not include the predefined break of the first contact.

9. the first movement condition requires that after the predetermined interruption of the first contact is detected during the first movement, movement of the first contact less than a threshold amount is detected before the lift-off of the first contact is detected; 9. The method of claim 8, wherein the second movement condition comprises a criterion that is met when movement of the first contact greater than the threshold amount is detected after the predefined break in the first contact is detected and before the lift-off of the first contact is detected.

10. the first movement condition includes a criterion that is met when a characteristic movement speed of the first contact during the first movement is below a threshold speed; The method of any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the second movement condition comprises a criterion that is met when the characteristic movement speed of the first contact during the first movement exceeds the threshold speed.

11. the first movement condition requires that a movement amount of the first contact be less than a threshold movement amount after satisfying the criterion, which is met when the characteristic movement speed of the first contact is less than the threshold speed of the first contact; 11. The method of claim 10, wherein the second movement condition includes a criterion that is met when a movement amount of the first contact is greater than the threshold movement amount after satisfying the criterion that is met when the characteristic movement speed of the first contact is below the threshold speed.

12. the first movement condition includes a criterion that is met when a threshold amount of deceleration of the first contact is detected during the first movement; The method of any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the second movement condition comprises a criterion that is met when the threshold amount of deceleration of the first contact is not detected during the first movement.

13. the first movement condition requires that after the threshold deceleration amount of the first contact is detected, movement of the first contact less than a threshold amount is detected before lift-off of the first contact is detected; 13. The method of claim 12, wherein the second movement condition comprises a criterion that is met when movement of the first contact greater than the threshold amount is detected after the threshold amount of deceleration of the first contact is detected and before lift-off of the first contact is detected.

14. the first movement condition includes a criterion that is met when, after the plurality of application views are displayed, a characteristic intensity of the first contact during the first movement does not exceed a predefined threshold intensity; 14. The method of claim 1, wherein the second movement condition comprises a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the first contact exceeds the predefined threshold intensity during the first movement after the plurality of application views are displayed.

15. the first movement condition includes a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the first contact exceeds a predefined threshold intensity during the first movement after the plurality of application views are displayed; 15. The method of claim 1, wherein the second movement condition comprises a criterion that is met when, after the plurality of application views are displayed, the characteristic intensity of the first contact during the first movement does not exceed the predefined threshold intensity.

16. the first contact movement condition requires that after the characteristic intensity of the first contact exceeds the predefined threshold intensity, a movement of the first contact becomes less than a threshold movement before liftoff of the first contact; 16. The method of claim 15, wherein the second contact movement condition comprises a criterion that is met when, after the characteristic intensity of the first contact exceeds the predefined threshold intensity, a movement of the first contact becomes greater than the threshold movement before liftoff of the first contact.

17. the plurality of application views are displayed in a first configuration before the application switcher display criteria are met; 17. The method of claim 1, wherein displaying the application switcher user interface comprises displaying the plurality of application views in a second configuration different from the first configuration.

18. 18. The method of claim 1, wherein the touch-sensitive surface is integrated with the display in a touch screen display, and the first movement of the first contact is detected across portions of the touch screen display on which the first user interface was displayed prior to the detection of the first contact.

19. Displaying the plurality of application views includes: The method of any one of claims 1 to 18, comprising dynamically changing an appearance of the plurality of application views according to a current value of a movement parameter of the first contact during the first movement.

20. Dynamically modifying the appearance of the plurality of application views according to the current value of the movement parameter of the first contact during the first movement includes:

20. The method of claim 19, comprising decreasing a size of each of the plurality of application views according to a current vertical distance between a focus selector and a predefined reference position on the display.

21. 21. The method of claim 20, comprising ceasing to display the plurality of application views in accordance with determining that the respective sizes of the first application views corresponding to the first user interface have decreased below a threshold size.

22. The first application view is an image of the first user interface, and the method includes: The method of any preceding claim, comprising dynamically resizing the first application view according to a current position of the first application view on the display.

23. The method of any preceding claim, comprising changing a current position of the first application view according to the first movement of the first contact.

24. 24. The method of claim 1, wherein dynamically changing the size of the first application view comprises continuing to change the size of the first application view according to movement of the first application view after lift-off of the first contact is detected.

25. Displaying the plurality of application views includes: In response to a determination that the application switcher display criteria is not met, displaying the first application view without displaying the second application view; responsive to a determination that the application switcher display criteria are met, displaying the first application view together with the second application view; The method of any one of claims 1 to 24, comprising:

26. 26. The method of claim 1, comprising ceasing to display the second application view of the plurality of application views while maintaining the display of the first application view in accordance with a determination that a home display criterion has been met.

27. 27. The method of claim 25 or 26, comprising, in accordance with a determination that the home display criteria are met, displaying an animated transition in which the first application view overlaid on the home screen user interface is transformed into a first application start icon on the home screen user interface corresponding to the first application.

28. Displaying the plurality of application views includes: during the first movement of the first contact, when the application switcher display criteria are met; displaying a first plurality of intermediate states between displaying the first application view and displaying the plurality of application views; During the first movement of the first contact, after the application switcher criteria are met and when the home display criteria are met, displaying a second plurality of intermediate states between displaying the plurality of application views and displaying the first application view; The method of any one of claims 1 to 27, comprising:

29. 29. The method of claim 1, further comprising displaying a third plurality of intermediate states between displaying the plurality of application views and displaying the home screen user interface during the first movement of the first contact, wherein the plurality of application views are displayed simultaneously with the home screen user interface during the plurality of intermediate states.

30. At a first time, the first contact completes a first portion of the first movement; At a second time, the first contact completes a second portion of the first movement that follows the first portion of the first movement; At a third time, the first contact completes a third portion of the first movement that reverses the second portion of the first movement; According to the first portion of the first movement, the application switcher display criterion is satisfied if lift-off of the first contact is detected at the first time point; according to the first portion and the second portion of the first movement, the home indication criterion is met if lift-off of the first contact is detected at the second time; 30. The method of claim 1, wherein the application switcher display criteria is satisfied if lift-off of the first contact is detected at the third time point according to the first portion, the second portion, and the third portion of the first movement.

31. the display includes a first protruding portion and a second protruding portion separated by a predefined cutout area that does not display content; Displaying the first user interface includes: displaying a first portion of the first user interface within the first projected portion of the display; displaying a second portion of the first user interface within the second projected portion of the display; refraining from displaying a third portion of the first user interface between the first portion of the first user interface and the second user interface; Including, Displaying the plurality of application views including the first application view includes:

31. The method of claim 1, further comprising displaying an image of the first user interface as the first application view, wherein the third portion of the first user interface is included in the image between the first and second portions of the first user interface.

32. 32. The method of claim 31 , wherein the first user interface is a full-screen user interface of the first application.

33. 33. The method of any one of claims 31 to 32, comprising displaying system information in at least one of the first and second projecting portions, the system information being overlaid on at least one of the first portion of the first user interface or the second portion of the first user interface.

34. 34. The method of claim 33, further comprising displaying additional system information concurrently with the plurality of application views, the additional system information not being displayed concurrently with the first user interface before the plurality of application views are displayed.

35. 35. The method of claim 1, comprising simultaneously displaying a control panel view corresponding to a control panel user interface of the device with the plurality of application views, the control panel user interface including a plurality of control affordances corresponding to a plurality of different control functions of the device.

36. In response to detecting the third portion of the input due to the first contact, 36. The method of claim 35, comprising displaying at least a portion of the control panel user interface within the application switcher user interface in accordance with determining that the application switcher display criteria are met.

37. The plurality of application views are displayed side by side; The method of any one of claims 35 to 36, wherein the control panel view is displayed in a first orientation relative to the plurality of application views.

38. 38. The method of claim 37, wherein the control panel view includes a first plurality of controls that are activatable by contact when the control panel view is displayed within the application switcher user interface to perform corresponding control operations on the device.

39. the first application view and the second application view are displayed in an arrangement along a first path; The method of any one of claims 35 to 36, wherein the control panel view and the first application view are displayed along the first path.

40. Detecting an application switch request to switch from a currently displayed application to a respective application that is not currently displayed; In response to detecting the application switching request, displaying a user interface of each of the applications; displaying a first visual prompt for a gesture that satisfies any one of the application switcher display criteria and the home display criteria in accordance with determining that a gesture prompt display criteria is met; refraining from displaying the first visual prompt in accordance with determining that the gesture prompt display criteria are not met; 40. The method of any one of claims 1 to 39, comprising:

41. 41. The method of claim 40, wherein the gesture prompting criteria include criteria that are met when the device recently completed an upgrade.

42. 42. The method of claim 40, comprising incrementing a counter each time the first visual prompt is displayed, and wherein the gesture prompt display criteria require that a current value of the counter does not exceed a predefined threshold for the gesture prompt display criteria to be satisfied.

43. displaying the first visual prompt includes displaying a home affordance having a first appearance; 43. The method of any one of claims 40 to 42, wherein refraining from displaying the first visual prompt comprises displaying the home affordance having a second appearance that is different from the first appearance.

44. A method according to any one of claims 40 to 43, comprising disabling at least a subset of the functionality of the respective application while displaying the first visual prompt.

45. upon determining that a prompt removal criterion has been met, the prompt removal criterion including a criterion that is met when a threshold amount of time has elapsed since an initial display of the first visual prompt; ceasing to display the first visual prompt; and enabling the subset of functionality of the respective applications that was disabled; 45. The method of claim 44, comprising:

46. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; detecting a first portion of input by a first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface on the display; detecting a second portion of the input due to the first contact, including detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface in a first direction after detecting the first portion of the input due to the first contact; displaying, during the first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, a plurality of application views including a first application view corresponding to the first user interface of the first application and a second application view corresponding to a second user interface of a second application different from the first application; detecting a third portion of the input by the first contact while displaying the plurality of application views, including detecting a lift-off of the first contact from the touch-sensitive surface after detecting the first movement of the first contact; In response to detecting the third portion of the input due to the first contact, pursuant to determining that an application switcher display criterion is satisfied, the application switcher display criterion requiring that the second portion of the input or the first application view satisfy a first movement condition, displaying an application switcher user interface including a representation of a plurality of applications for selectively activating one of the applications represented in the application switcher user interface; displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to a plurality of applications in accordance with a determination that a home display criterion is satisfied, the home display criterion requiring that the second portion of the input or the first application view satisfy a second transition condition that is different from the first transition condition; An electronic device containing instructions.

47. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; detecting a first portion of input by the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface on the display; detecting a second portion of the input due to the first contact, including detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface in a first direction after detecting the first portion of the input due to the first contact; displaying, during the first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, a plurality of application views including a first application view corresponding to the first user interface of the first application and a second application view corresponding to a second user interface of a second application different from the first application; detecting a third portion of the input due to the first contact while displaying the plurality of application views, including detecting lift-off of the first contact from the touch-sensitive surface after detecting the first movement of the first contact; In response to detecting the third portion of the input due to the first contact, pursuant to determining that an application switcher display criterion is satisfied, the application switcher display criterion requiring that the second portion of the input or the first application view satisfy a first movement condition, displaying the application switcher user interface including a representation of a plurality of applications for selectively activating one of the plurality of applications represented in the application switcher user interface; displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to a plurality of applications in accordance with determining that a home display criterion is satisfied, the home display criterion requiring that the second portion of the input or the first application view satisfy a second transition condition that is different from the first transition condition; A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium containing instructions.

48. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and means for displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; means for detecting a first portion of input by the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface on the display; means for detecting a second portion of the input due to the first contact, including detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface in a first direction after detecting the first portion of the input due to the first contact; means for displaying, during the first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, a plurality of application views, including a first application view corresponding to the first user interface of the first application and a second application view corresponding to a second user interface of a second application different from the first application; means for detecting a third portion of the input due to the first contact while displaying the plurality of application views, including detecting lift-off of the first contact from the touch-sensitive surface after detecting the first movement of the first contact; In response to detecting the third portion of the input due to the first contact, means for displaying an application switcher user interface including a representation of a plurality of applications for selectively activating one of the plurality of applications represented in the application switcher user interface in accordance with a determination that an application switcher display criterion is satisfied, the satisfaction of the application switcher display criterion requiring that the second portion of the input or the first application view satisfy a first movement condition; means for displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to a plurality of applications in accordance with a determination that a home display criterion is satisfied, the home display criterion requiring that the second portion of the input or the first application view satisfy a second transition condition that is different from the first transition condition; An electronic device comprising:

49. 1. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, comprising: means for displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; means for detecting a first portion of input by the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface on the display; means for detecting a second portion of the input due to the first contact, including detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface in a first direction after detecting the first portion of the input due to the first contact; means for displaying, during the first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, a plurality of application views, including a first application view corresponding to the first user interface of the first application and a second application view corresponding to a second user interface of a second application different from the first application; means for detecting a third portion of the input due to the first contact while displaying the plurality of application views, including detecting lift-off of the first contact from the touch-sensitive surface after detecting the first movement of the first contact; In response to detecting the third portion of the input due to the first contact, means for displaying the application switcher user interface including a representation of a plurality of applications for selectively activating one of the applications represented within the application switcher user interface in accordance with a determination that an application switcher display criterion is satisfied, the satisfaction of the application switcher display criterion requiring that the second portion of the input or the first application view satisfy a first movement condition; means for displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to a plurality of applications in accordance with a determination that a home display criterion is satisfied, the home display criterion requiring that the second portion of the input or the first application view satisfy a second transition condition that is different from the first transition condition; An information processing device comprising:

50. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 1 to 45.

51. 46. ​​A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform any of the methods of claims 1-45.

52. 46. ​​A graphical user interface on an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors executing one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising a user interface displayed according to any of the methods of claims 1 to 45.

53. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and means for carrying out any of the methods of claims 1 to 45; An electronic device comprising:

54. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, the information processing apparatus comprising means for performing any of the methods of claims 1 to 45.

55. In a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; detecting input due to the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the first contact at the end of the first movement, while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display; In response to detecting the input by the first contact, displaying a second user interface of a second application distinct from the first application in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a last application display criterion, the last application display criterion requiring the first movement to satisfy a first directional condition; displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to a plurality of applications installed on the device in accordance with determining that the input satisfies a home display criterion, the home display criterion requiring that the first movement satisfy a second directional condition distinct from the first directional condition; A method comprising:

56. 56. The method of claim 55, wherein the first contact is detected within a predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface, and wherein an initial portion of the first movement includes movement in a vertical direction and movement in a horizontal direction relative to the predefined edge of the touch-sensitive surface.

57. In response to detecting the input by the first contact, 57. The method of claim 55, further comprising: displaying an application switcher user interface including a first application view corresponding to the first user interface of the first application and a second application view corresponding to a second user interface of a second application different from the first application in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies an application switcher display criterion that is distinct from the home display criterion and the last application display criterion, the application switcher display criterion being distinct from the home display criterion and the last application display criterion, the application switcher display criterion requiring the first movement to satisfy the second directional condition.

58. The application switcher display criteria include:

58. The method of claim 57, comprising a first criterion that is met when the first movement includes a predefined interruption, wherein an amount of movement of the first contact after the predefined interruption is less than a first threshold amount of movement.

59. the application switcher display criteria include a second criterion that is met when a predefined movement parameter of the first movement is within a first range of values; 59. The method of any one of claims 57 to 58, wherein the home indication criteria include a third criterion that is met when the predefined movement parameter of the first movement is in a second value range different from the first value range.

60. the application switcher display criteria include criteria that are met when horizontal and vertical movement of the first contact during the first movement meet a first requirement; 60. The method of any one of claims 57 to 59, wherein the final application display criteria include criteria that are met when the horizontal movement and the vertical movement of the first contact during the first movement satisfy a second requirement that is different from the first requirement.

61. displaying the first application view in accordance with a determination that the first movement satisfies the second directional condition before displaying the application switcher user interface; moving the first application view in accordance with the first movement of the first contact; 61. The method of any one of claims 57 to 60, comprising:

62. the application switcher display criteria include criteria that are met when a predefined predicted position of the first application view after liftoff of the first contact is in a first predefined region of the display; 62. The method of claim 61 , wherein the last application display criteria include criteria that are met when the predefined predicted position of the first application view after liftoff of the first contact is in a second predefined area of ​​the display that is distinct from the first predefined area.

63. In response to detecting the input by the first contact, 63. The method of claim 62, comprising displaying a control panel user interface including a plurality of controls corresponding to functions of a plurality of systems of the device in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies control panel display criteria, the control panel display criteria including criteria that, for a third directional condition to be satisfied, the first movement satisfies a third directional condition that is different from the first directional condition and the second directional condition.

64. 64. The method of claim 63, wherein the control panel display criteria include criteria that are met when the predefined predicted position of the first application view after liftoff of the first contact is in a third predefined area of ​​the display that is separate from the first predefined area and the second predefined area.

65. detecting a second input due to the second contact, including detecting a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting a second movement of the second contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the second contact at the end of the second movement, while displaying the second user interface of the second application in response to detecting the input due to the first contact; In response to detecting the second input, redisplaying the first user interface or displaying a third user interface of a third application separate from the first application and the second application in accordance with determining that the second input satisfies the last application display criterion; 65. The method of any one of claims 55 to 64, comprising:

66. the first user interface is redisplayed in response to the second input in accordance with a determination that a re-classification criterion has been met, the re-classification criterion including a criterion that is met when a threshold amount of time has elapsed between detecting the second contact and lift-off of the first contact; 66. The method of claim 65, wherein, following a determination that the reclassification criteria are not met, the third user interface is displayed in response to the second input.

67. In response to detecting the second input, in response to determining that the second movement satisfies a third directional condition opposite to the first directional condition; displaying a control panel user interface including a plurality of controls corresponding to functions of a plurality of systems of the device in accordance with a determination that the re-classification criteria are met; redisplaying the first user interface in accordance with a determination that the re-categorization criteria are not met; and 67. The method of any one of claims 55 to 66, comprising:

68. In response to detecting the first movement of the first contact, simultaneously displaying at least a portion of the first user interface and a portion of the second user interface within a first display layer during at least a portion of the first movement of the first contact; displaying the home screen user interface in a second display layer below the first display layer; 68. The method of any one of claims 55 to 67, comprising:

69. responsive to detecting the input due to the first contact, while displaying the second user interface of the second application, detecting a third input due to the third contact, including detecting a third contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting a third movement of the third contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the third contact at the end of the third movement; In response to detecting the third input, in response to a determination that the first user interface is a user interface of a first orientation and the second user interface is a user interface of a second orientation different from the first orientation, and the third movement satisfies a modified last application display criterion that, to be satisfied, requires the third movement to satisfy either the first directional condition or an opposite second directional condition; displaying a user interface for each application below the second application in an application stack of the device; and 69. The method of any one of claims 55 to 68, comprising:

70. In response to detecting the third input, in response to a determination that the first user interface is a user interface of the first orientation and the second user interface is a user interface of the second orientation different from the first orientation, and the third movement satisfies a modified home indication criterion that requires, to be satisfied, the third movement to satisfy either the first directional condition or the second directional condition; displaying the home screen user interface 70. The method of claim 69, comprising:

71. 71. The method of claim 70, comprising refraining from applying the modified last application display criteria and the modified home display criteria to the third input pursuant to a determination that the third input is detected a threshold amount of time after termination of the first input.

72. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; detecting input due to the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the first contact at the end of the first movement; In response to detecting the input by the first contact, displaying a second user interface of a second application distinct from the first application in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a last application display criterion, the last application display criterion requiring that the first movement satisfy a first directional condition; displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to a plurality of applications installed on the device pursuant to determining that the input satisfies a home display criterion that, to be satisfied, requires the first movement to satisfy a second directional condition distinct from the first directional condition. An electronic device containing instructions.

73. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; detecting input due to the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the first contact at the end of the first movement; In response to detecting the input by the first contact, displaying a second user interface of a second application distinct from the first application in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a last application display criterion, the last application display criterion requiring that the first movement satisfy a first directional condition; displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to a plurality of applications installed on the device pursuant to determining that the input satisfies a home display criterion that, to be satisfied, requires the first movement to satisfy a second directional condition distinct from the first directional condition; A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium containing instructions.

74. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and means for displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; means for detecting input due to the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the first contact at the end of the first movement; In response to detecting the input by the first contact, means for displaying a second user interface of a second application, separate from the first application, in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a last application display criterion, the last application display criterion requiring that the first movement satisfy a first directional condition; means for displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to a plurality of applications installed on the device in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a home display criterion, the home display criterion requiring that the first movement satisfy a second directional condition distinct from the first directional condition; An electronic device comprising:

75. 1. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, comprising: means for displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; means for detecting input due to the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the first contact at the end of the first movement; In response to detecting the input by the first contact, means for displaying a second user interface of a second application, separate from the first application, in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a last application display criterion, the last application display criterion requiring that the first movement satisfy a first directional condition; means for displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to a plurality of applications installed on the device in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a home display criterion, the home display criterion requiring that the first movement satisfy a second directional condition distinct from the first directional condition; An information processing device comprising:

76. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 55 to 71.

77. 72. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform any of the methods of claims 55-71.

78. 72. A graphical user interface on an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors executing one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising a user interface displayed according to any of the methods of claims 55 to 71.

79. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and means for carrying out any of the methods of claims 55 to 71; An electronic device comprising:

80. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, the information processing apparatus comprising means for performing any of the methods of claims 55 to 71.

81. In a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; detecting input due to the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the first contact at the end of the first movement, while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display; In response to detecting the input by the first contact, displaying a second user interface of a second application separate from the first application in accordance with determining that the input meets an edge swipe criterion and that the first movement meets a first directional condition; displaying a control panel user interface including a plurality of controls corresponding to functions of a plurality of systems of the device in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies the edge swipe criteria and that the first movement satisfies a second directional condition distinct from the first directional condition; upon determining that the input does not meet the edge swipe criteria, refraining from displaying the second user interface of the second application; and refraining from displaying the control panel user interface; executing a function within the first application according to the first movement of the first contact; A method comprising:

82. Executing a function within the first application in accordance with the first movement of the first contact includes: performing a first function in response to determining that the first movement is in a first direction; performing a second function distinct from the second function in response to determining that the first movement is in a second direction distinct from the first function; 82. The method of claim 81, comprising:

83. The edge swipe criterion is that, prior to the first movement of the first contact satisfying either the first directional condition or the second directional condition, For the edge swipe criterion to be met, the first contact must be detected within a predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface; and the initial movement of the first contact satisfies a third directional condition different from the first directional condition and the second directional condition; The method according to any one of claims 81 to 82, wherein the method comprises:

84. 84. The method of any one of claims 81 to 83, wherein the edge swipe criteria include criteria that are met when the first contact reaches a first threshold position on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement.

85. displaying a first application view corresponding to the first user interface in response to detecting an initial portion of the first movement of the first contact; modifying a characteristic position of the first application view according to the initial portion of the first movement of the first contact; 85. The method of any one of claims 81 to 84, comprising:

86. 86. The method of claim 85, wherein the edge swipe criteria include criteria that are met when a predicted position of the first application view after liftoff of the first contact reaches a second threshold position on the touch-sensitive surface.

87. 87. The method of any one of claims 85 to 86, wherein the edge swipe criteria include criteria that are met when a speed of movement of the first application view in a first direction at liftoff of the first contact exceeds a first threshold speed on the display.

88. displaying a second application view corresponding to the second user interface in response to detecting the initial portion of the first movement of the first contact; modifying a representative portion of the second user interface object according to the initial portion of the first movement of the first contact; 88. The method of any one of claims 85 to 87, comprising:

89. 89. A method according to any one of claims 81 to 88, wherein the edge swipe criteria include criteria that are met when a characteristic velocity of the first contact in a second direction does not exceed a second threshold velocity.

90. 90. A method according to any one of claims 81 to 89, wherein the edge swipe criteria include criteria that are met when a characteristic velocity of the first contact in the first direction exceeds a third threshold velocity.

91. In response to detecting the input by the first contact, 91. The method of claim 81, further comprising: displaying an application switcher user interface including a representation of the first user interface and a representation of each of one or more other open applications in accordance with a determination that the first movement of the first contact includes an interruption before the first contact reaches a threshold position on the touch-sensitive surface.

92. detecting a second input by the second contact, including detecting a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the second user interface of the second application in response to the input by the first contact, detecting a second movement of the second contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the second contact at an end of the second movement, wherein the second input satisfies the edge swipe criterion; and in response to detecting the second input with the second contact satisfying the edge swipe criteria; In response to determining that the second movement satisfies the second directional condition, displaying the control panel user interface, the control panel user interface including a plurality of controls corresponding to functions of a plurality of systems of the device, in accordance with a determination that the second input time exceeding a threshold amount of time is detected after termination of the input by the first contact; redisplaying the first user interface of the first application in accordance with a determination that the second input time period less than the threshold amount of time has been detected after the termination of the input by the first contact; and 92. The method of any one of claims 81 to 91, comprising:

93. In response to detecting the input by the first contact, 93. The method of any one of claims 81 to 92, wherein, in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a home display criterion requiring that the first movement satisfy a third directional condition different from the first directional condition and the second directional condition, and that the first movement satisfy a fast swipe criterion, displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to a plurality of applications installed on the device.

94. In response to detecting the input by the first contact, 94. The method of claim 81, comprising displaying an application switcher user interface including a representation of a plurality of applications for selectively activating one of a plurality of recently opened applications in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies application switcher display criteria that require the first movement to satisfy a third directional condition different from the first directional condition and the second directional condition, and the input to satisfy a slow swipe criterion.

95. At least each portion of the control panel user interface is at least partially translucent, and the method comprises: detecting an edge swipe gesture that satisfies a control panel display criterion while displaying a respective user interface on the display; displaying the control panel user interface in response to detecting the edge swipe gesture that satisfies the control panel display criteria; displaying the control panel user interface displayed over the respective application pursuant to a determination that the control panel interface was triggered via an edge swipe gesture initiated while the respective application was displayed on the display, wherein an appearance of the respective application affects an appearance of the respective portion of the control panel user interface that is at least partially translucent; displaying a control panel user interface displayed over the system user interface pursuant to a determination that the control panel user interface was invoked while a system user interface was being displayed on the display, the system user interface corresponding to a plurality of applications, and an appearance of the system user interface affecting the appearance of the respective portions of the control panel user interface that are at least partially translucent; and 95. The method of any one of claims 81 to 94, comprising:

96. 1. An electronic device comprising: The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; detecting input due to the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the first contact at the end of the first movement; In response to detecting the input by the first contact, displaying a second user interface of a second application separate from the first application in accordance with determining that the input satisfies an edge swipe criterion and that the first movement satisfies a first directional condition; displaying a control panel user interface including a plurality of controls corresponding to functions of a plurality of systems of the device in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies the edge swipe criteria and the first movement satisfies a second directional condition distinct from the first directional condition; upon determining that the input does not meet the edge swipe criteria, refraining from displaying the second user interface of the second application; refraining from displaying the control panel user interface; executing a function within the first application in accordance with the first movement of the first contact; An electronic device containing instructions.

97. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; detecting input due to the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the first contact at the end of the first movement; In response to detecting the input by the first contact, displaying a second user interface of a second application separate from the first application in accordance with determining that the input satisfies an edge swipe criterion and that the first movement satisfies a first directional condition; displaying a control panel user interface including a plurality of controls corresponding to functions of a plurality of systems of the device in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies the edge swipe criteria and that the first movement satisfies a second directional condition distinct from the first directional condition; upon determining that the input does not meet the edge swipe criteria, refraining from displaying the second user interface of the second application; refraining from displaying the control panel user interface; causing a function within the first application to be executed in accordance with the first movement of the first contact; A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium containing instructions.

98. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and means for displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; means for detecting input due to the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the first contact at the end of the first movement; In response to detecting the input by the first contact, means for displaying a second user interface of a second application separate from the first application in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies an edge swipe criterion and that the first movement satisfies a first directional condition; means for displaying a control panel user interface including a plurality of controls corresponding to functions of a plurality of systems of the device in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies the edge swipe criteria and the first movement satisfies a second directional condition distinct from the first directional condition; upon determining that the input does not meet the edge swipe criteria, means for refraining from displaying the second user interface of the second application; means for refraining from displaying the control panel user interface; means for executing a function within the first application in accordance with the first movement of the first contact; An electronic device comprising:

99. 1. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, comprising: means for displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; means for detecting input due to the first contact, including detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display, detecting a first movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting lift-off of the first contact at the end of the first movement; In response to detecting the input by the first contact, means for displaying a second user interface of a second application separate from the first application in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies an edge swipe criterion and that the first movement satisfies a first directional condition; means for displaying a control panel user interface including a plurality of controls corresponding to functions of a plurality of systems of the device in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies the edge swipe criteria and the first movement satisfies a second directional condition distinct from the first directional condition; upon determining that the input does not meet the edge swipe criteria, means for refraining from displaying the second user interface of the second application; means for refraining from displaying the control panel user interface; means for executing a function within the first application in accordance with the first movement of the first contact; An information processing device comprising:

100. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 81 to 95.

101. 96. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform any of the methods of claims 81-95.

102. 96. A graphical user interface on an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors executing one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising a user interface displayed according to any of the methods of claims 81 to 95.

103. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and means for carrying out any of the methods of claims 81 to 95; An electronic device comprising:

104. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, the information processing apparatus comprising means for performing any of the methods of claims 81 to 95.

105. In a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface that satisfies a navigation gesture criterion while displaying the first user interface of the first application, the navigation gesture criterion requiring that the first input include a movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface beyond a boundary of a predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface for the navigation gesture criterion to be satisfied; In response to detecting the first input by the first contact that satisfies the navigation gesture criteria, ceasing to display the first user interface of the first application and displaying a respective other user interface on the display in accordance with determining that the first application is not protected; maintaining display of the first user interface of the first application without displaying the respective other user interfaces in accordance with determining that the first application is protected; A method comprising:

106. the navigation gesture reference is a home gesture reference; 106. The method of claim 105, wherein each other user interface is a home screen user interface.

107. the navigation gesture standard is an application switcher gesture standard; 106. The method of claim 105, wherein the each other user interface is an application switcher user interface.

108. the navigation gesture reference is an application switching gesture reference; 106. The method of claim 105, wherein each other user interface is another application.

109. the navigation gesture standard is a control panel gesture standard; 106. The method of claim 105, wherein each other user interface is a control panel user interface.

110. 110. The method of any one of claims 105 to 109, wherein the first application is determined to be protected when an input that satisfies the navigation gesture criteria also satisfies respective criteria for triggering functions provided by the first user interface of the first application.

111. 111. The method of any one of claims 105 to 110, wherein the first application is determined to be protected when the first application is operating in one of a plurality of predefined protected modes.

112. In response to detecting the first input by the first contact that satisfies the navigation gesture criteria, 112. The method of claim 105, further comprising: displaying, in accordance with a determination that the first application is protected, an affordance overlaid on the first user interface of the first application to indicate that a confirmation input that satisfies the navigation gesture criteria is required to release the first application determined to be protected and display the respective other user interface.

113. In response to detecting the first input by the first contact that satisfies the navigation gesture criteria, 112. The method of any one of claims 105 to 111, comprising: in accordance with determining that the first application is protected, executing a function in the first application in accordance with the first input.

114. In response to detecting the first input due to the first contact, it is determined that the first application is protected, and display of the first user interface of the first application is maintained; The method comprises: after refraining from displaying the respective other user interface in response to detecting the first input due to the first contact, detecting a second input due to a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface that satisfies the navigation gesture criteria while maintaining display of the first user interface of the first application; in response to detecting the second input by the second contact on the touch-sensitive surface that satisfies the navigation gesture criteria; ceasing, on the display, to display the first user interface of the first application and displaying the respective other user interface in accordance with determining that the second input is detected within a confirmation time threshold of the first input; The method of any one of claims 105 to 113, comprising:

115. detecting a third input by a third contact on the touch-sensitive surface that satisfies the navigation gesture criteria while displaying the first user interface of the first application on the display; In response to detecting the third input, ceasing to display the first user interface of the first application and displaying the respective other user interface according to a determination that the third input by the third contact satisfies an extended navigation gesture criterion that, to be satisfied, requires movement of the third contact across the touch-sensitive surface beyond the boundary of the predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface and one or more additional conditions; regardless of whether the first application is determined to be protected; maintaining display of the first user interface of the first application in accordance with a determination that the third input from the third contact does not satisfy the enhanced navigation gesture criteria and the application is protected; and ceasing to display the first user interface of the first application and displaying the respective other user interface in accordance with a determination that the third input due to the third contact does not satisfy the extended navigation gesture criteria and the application is not protected; and The method of any one of claims 105 to 114, comprising:

116. 116. The method of claim 115, wherein the extended navigation gesture criteria include criteria that are met when a characteristic intensity of the third contact exceeds a first intensity threshold prior to the movement of the third contact across the boundary of the predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface.

117. 117. The method of any one of claims 115 to 116, wherein the enhanced navigation gesture criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the third contact during the movement of the third contact exceeds a second intensity threshold.

118. 118. The method of claim 115, wherein the extended navigation gesture criteria include criteria that are met when the third contact is maintained within a predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface at less than a threshold movement amount for more than a first threshold amount of time before the movement across the boundary of the predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface.

119. 119. The method of claim 118, comprising displaying an indication overlaid on the first user interface in response to detecting that the third contact was maintained within the predefined edge region for longer than the first threshold amount of time with less than the threshold amount of movement.

120. 120. The method of any one of claims 115 to 119, wherein the extended navigation gesture criteria include criteria that are met when the movement of a third contact is interrupted after an initial movement of the third contact for more than a threshold amount of time before final movement across the touch-sensitive surface is completed.

121. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; while displaying the first user interface of the first application, detecting a first input by the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface that satisfies a navigation gesture criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that the first input include a movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface beyond a boundary of a predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface; In response to detecting the first input by the first contact that satisfies the navigation gesture criteria, ceasing to display the first user interface of the first application and displaying each other user interface on the display in accordance with determining that the first application is not protected; maintaining display of the first user interface of the first application without displaying the respective other user interfaces in accordance with a determination that the first application is protected; An electronic device containing instructions.

122. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to: displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; while displaying the first user interface of the first application, detecting a first input by the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface that satisfies a navigation gesture criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that the first input include a movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface beyond a boundary of a predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface; In response to detecting the first input by the first contact that satisfies the navigation gesture criteria, ceasing to display the first user interface of the first application and displaying each other user interface on the display in accordance with determining that the first application is not protected; maintaining display of the first user interface of the first application without displaying the respective other user interfaces in accordance with a determination that the first application is protected; A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium containing instructions.

123. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and means for displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; means for detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface that satisfies a navigation gesture criterion while displaying the first user interface of the first application, the navigation gesture criterion requiring that the first input include a movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface that exceeds a boundary of a predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface for the navigation gesture criterion to be satisfied; In response to detecting the first input by the first contact that satisfies the navigation gesture criteria, means for ceasing to display the first user interface of the first application on the display and displaying a respective other user interface in accordance with a determination that the first application is not protected; means for maintaining display of the first user interface of the first application without displaying the respective other user interfaces in accordance with a determination that the first application is protected; An electronic device comprising:

124. 1. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, comprising: means for displaying a first user interface of a first application on the display; means for detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface that satisfies a navigation gesture criterion while displaying the first user interface of the first application, the navigation gesture criterion requiring that the first input include a movement of the first contact across the touch-sensitive surface that exceeds a boundary of a predefined edge region of the touch-sensitive surface for the navigation gesture criterion to be satisfied; In response to detecting the first input by the first contact that satisfies the navigation gesture criteria, means for ceasing to display the first user interface of the first application on the display and displaying a respective other user interface in accordance with a determination that the first application is not protected; means for maintaining display of the first user interface of the first application without displaying the respective other user interfaces in accordance with a determination that the first application is protected; An information processing device comprising:

125. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 105 to 120.

126. 121. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform any of the methods of claims 105-120.

127. 121. A graphical user interface on an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors executing one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising a user interface displayed according to any of the methods of claims 105 to 120.

128. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and means for carrying out any of the methods of claims 105 to 120; An electronic device comprising:

129. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, the information processing apparatus comprising means for performing any of the methods of claims 105 to 120.

130. In a device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, displaying a control panel user interface, the control panel user interface including a first control area, the first control area including a first control for controlling a first function of the device and a second control for controlling a second function of the device; Detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the first input due to the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; pursuant to a determination that the first input satisfies a control area enlargement criterion, the enlargement criterion requiring an intensity of the first contact to exceed a first intensity threshold, replacing a display of the first control area with a display of an enlarged first control area, the enlarged first control area including the first control, the second control, and one or more additional controls not included in the first control area; activating the first control for controlling the first function of the device in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a first control activation criterion, the first control activation criterion, to be satisfied, requiring the first contact to be detected at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the first control within the first control region and not requiring an intensity of the first contact to exceed the first intensity threshold; activating the second control to control the second function of the device in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a second control activation criterion, the second control activation criterion, which, to be satisfied, requires the first contact to be detected at a second location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the second control within the first control region and does not require the intensity of the first contact to exceed the first intensity threshold; A method comprising:

131. in response to detecting the first input due to the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; changing an appearance of the first control without changing an appearance of the second control in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies the first control activation criterion; changing the appearance of the second control without changing the appearance of the first control in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies the second control activation criterion; 131. The method of claim 130, comprising:

132. in response to detecting the first input due to the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 132. The method of claim 130, further comprising: displaying visual feedback that includes dynamically changing an appearance of the first control area in accordance with a change in an intensity parameter of the first contact in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies first expanded hint criteria that require a location of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface to correspond to a portion of the first control area.

133. in response to detecting the first input due to the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; 133. The method of claim 132, comprising displaying a second visual effect that dynamically changes in accordance with a change in an intensity parameter of the first contact in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies second expanded hint criteria, the second expanded hint criteria requiring that a location of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface correspond to a second control area separate from the first control area or a third control located outside the first control area, and the second hint display criteria not requiring that an intensity of the first contact exceed the first intensity threshold.

134. 134. The method of any one of claims 130 to 133, wherein the control region expansion criterion does not require that the first contact be detected at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to an unoccupied portion of the first control region for the control region expansion criterion to be satisfied.

135. detecting a second input, including detecting a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the enlarged first control area while the enlarged first control area is displayed; in response to detecting the second input due to the second contact on the touch-sensitive surface; replacing a representation of each control in the expanded first control region with a representation of a first expanded control corresponding to the respective control in accordance with a determination that the second input satisfies an expanded control display criterion, the criterion requiring, to be satisfied, that an intensity of the second contact exceed the first intensity threshold; activating the first control to control the first function of the device in accordance with a determination that the second input satisfies a third control activation criterion, the third control activation criterion, which, to be satisfied, requires the second contact to be detected at a third location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the first control within the expanded first control area and does not require the intensity of the second contact to exceed the first intensity threshold; activating the second control to control the second function of the device in accordance with a determination that the second input satisfies a fourth control activation criterion, the fourth control activation criterion, which, to be satisfied, requires the second contact to be detected at a fourth location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the second control within the expanded first control area and does not require the intensity of the second contact to exceed the first intensity threshold; The method of any one of claims 130 to 134, comprising:

136. the respective control is the first control, The method comprises: maintaining the second contact on the touch-sensitive surface while displaying the first expanded control corresponding to the first control in the expanded first control area; detecting a third input due to the second contact, including detecting movement of the second contact across the touch-sensitive surface to the fourth location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the second control within the expanded first control area, and detecting an increase in intensity of the second contact above the first intensity threshold while the second contact is detected at the fourth location; In response to detecting the third input due to the second contact, replacing the representation of the second control in the expanded first control area with a representation of a second expanded control corresponding to the second control in accordance with determining that the third input satisfies the expanded control representation criteria; 136. The method of claim 135, comprising:

137. prior to displaying the expanded first control region, the first control is displayed in a first state within the first control region; while the first control is displayed within the expanded first control area, the second input changes the current state of the first control to a second state distinct from the first state; The method comprises: detecting a fourth input that satisfies an expanded release criterion while displaying the first control in the second state within the expanded first control area; in response to detecting the fourth input satisfying the extended release criterion, replacing the display of the first expanded control area with the display of the first control area, the first control being displayed in the second state within the first control area; and 137. The method of claim 135 or 136, comprising:

138. in response to detecting the first input due to the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; applying a first visual change to a portion of the control panel user interface outside the first control area in accordance with determining that the first input satisfies the control area expansion criterion; in response to detecting the second input due to the second contact on the touch-sensitive surface; applying a second visual change to a portion of the expanded first control area outside the first expanded control in accordance with determining that the second input satisfies the expanded control display criteria; 138. The method of any one of claims 135 to 137, comprising:

139. 139. A method according to any one of claims 130 to 138, comprising, in response to detecting the first input, displaying an animation of the first control region having a size determined based on an intensity of the first input.

140. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising: displaying a control panel user interface including a first control area, the first control area including a first control for controlling a first function of the device and a second control for controlling a second function of the device; Detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the first input due to the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; pursuant to a determination that the first input satisfies a control region enlargement criterion, the enlargement criterion requiring an intensity of the first contact to exceed a first intensity threshold, replacing the display of the first control region with a display of an enlarged first control region that includes the first control, the second control, and one or more additional controls not included in the first control region; activating the first control for controlling the first function of the device in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a first control activation criterion, the first control activation criterion, to be satisfied, requiring the first contact to be detected at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the first control within the first control region and not requiring an intensity of the first contact to exceed the first intensity threshold; activating the second control for controlling the second function of the device in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a second control activation criterion, the second control activation criterion, which, to be satisfied, requires the first contact to be detected at a second location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the second control within the first control area and does not require the intensity of the first contact to exceed the first intensity threshold. An electronic device containing instructions.

141. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to: displaying a control panel user interface including a first control area, the first control area including a first control for controlling a first function of the device and a second control for controlling a second function of the device; detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the first input due to the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; pursuant to a determination that the first input satisfies a control region enlargement criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that an intensity of the first contact exceed a first intensity threshold, replacing the display of the first control region with a display of an enlarged first control region, the enlarged first control region including the first control, the second control, and one or more additional controls not included in the first control region; activating the first control for controlling the first function of the device in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a first control activation criterion, the first control activation criterion, to be satisfied, requiring the first contact to be detected at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the first control within the first control region and not requiring an intensity of the first contact to exceed the first intensity threshold; activating the second control for controlling the second function of the device in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a second control activation criterion, the second control activation criterion, which, to be satisfied, requires the first contact to be detected at a second location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the second control within the first control area and does not require the intensity of the first contact to exceed the first intensity threshold. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium containing instructions.

142. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and means for displaying a control panel user interface, the control panel user interface including a first control area, the first control area including a first control for controlling a first function of the device and a second control for controlling a second function of the device; means for detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the first input due to the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; means for replacing a display of the first control area with a display of an enlarged first control area in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a control area enlargement criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that the intensity of the first contact exceed a first intensity threshold, the enlarged first control area including the first control, the second control, and one or more additional controls not included in the first control area; means for activating the first control for controlling the first function of the device in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a first control activation criterion, the first control activation criterion, to be satisfied, requiring the first contact to be detected at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the first control within the first control region and not requiring the intensity of the first contact to exceed the first intensity threshold; means for activating the second control for controlling the second function of the device in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a second control activation criterion, the second control activation criterion, to be satisfied, requiring the first contact to be detected at a second location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the second control within the first control region and not requiring the intensity of the first contact to exceed the first intensity threshold; An electronic device comprising:

143. 1. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, comprising: means for displaying a control panel user interface, the control panel user interface including a first control area, the first control area including a first control for controlling a first function of the device and a second control for controlling a second function of the device; means for detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the first input due to the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; means for replacing a display of the first control area with a display of an enlarged first control area in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a control area enlargement criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that the intensity of the first contact exceed a first intensity threshold, the enlarged first control area including the first control, the second control, and one or more additional controls not included in the first control area; means for activating the first control for controlling the first function of the device in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a first control activation criterion, the first control activation criterion, to be satisfied, requiring the first contact to be detected at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the first control within the first control region and not requiring the intensity of the first contact to exceed the first intensity threshold; means for activating the second control for controlling the second function of the device in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies a second control activation criterion, the second control activation criterion, to be satisfied, requiring the first contact to be detected at a second location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the second control within the first control region and not requiring the intensity of the first contact to exceed the first intensity threshold; An information processing device comprising:

144. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 130 to 139.

145. 140. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform any of the methods of claims 130-139.

146. 140. A graphical user interface on an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors executing one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising a user interface displayed according to any of the methods of claims 130 to 139.

147. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and means for carrying out any of the methods of claims 130 to 139; An electronic device comprising:

148. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, the information processing apparatus comprising means for performing any of the methods of claims 130 to 139.

149. In an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, displaying a first user interface on the display; Detecting a first input while displaying the first user interface; In response to detecting the first input, displaying a control panel user interface in a first configuration; the control panel user interface in the first configuration includes a first set of control affordances in a first region of the control panel user interface that correspond to respective functions of the device; a first subset of the first set of control affordances is not user-configurable, and a second subset of the first set of control affordances is user-configurable; And, detecting a second input after displaying the control panel user interface in the first configuration; In response to detecting the second input, displaying a control panel configuration user interface; The control panel configuration user interface includes: a representation of the second subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state without displaying the first subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state; and a representation of a second set of control affordances distinct from the first set of control affordances in an unselected state, wherein control affordances corresponding to the representation of the second set of control affordances are not included in the control panel user interface in the first configuration; and Displaying And, detecting one or more configuration inputs while displaying the control panel configuration user interface, including detecting a third input that changes a selection state for a representation of a first control affordance in the second set of control affordances from the unselected state to the selected state; detecting a fourth input after detecting the third input that changes the selection state for the representation of the first control affordance from the unselected state to the selected state; in response to detecting the fourth input, displaying the control panel user interface in a second configuration distinct from the first configuration, the control panel user interface in the second configuration including the first control affordance within the first region of the control panel user interface; A method comprising:

150. detecting the one or more configuration inputs includes detecting a fifth input that changes the selection state for a representation of a second control affordance in the second subset of the first set of control affordances from the selected state to the unselected state; 150. The method of claim 149, wherein displaying the control panel user interface in the second configuration comprises excluding the second control affordance from the control panel user interface in the second configuration.

151. the control panel user interface in the first configuration displays a third control affordance and a fourth control affordance of the first set of control affordances in a first order according to an order of the representation of the first set of control affordances in the control panel setting user interface; detecting the one or more configuration inputs includes detecting a sixth input that reorders representations of the third control affordance and the fourth control affordance in the control panel configuration user interface; 151. The method of any one of claims 149 to 150, wherein displaying the control panel user interface in the second configuration comprises displaying the third control affordance and the fourth control affordance in a second order different from the first order.

152. the control panel user interface displays accessibility control affordances; The method comprises: detecting an input associated with the accessibility control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the accessibility control affordance while displaying the accessibility control affordance within the control panel user interface; In response to detecting the input associated with the accessibility control affordance, displaying a plurality of selectable control options corresponding to the accessibility control affordance according to determining that a control expansion criterion is satisfied by the input associated with the accessibility control affordance; and toggling a control function corresponding to the currently selected control option in accordance with determining that a control toggle criterion, which, to be satisfied, requires that one of a plurality of selectable options corresponding to the accessibility control affordance is currently selected when the input associated with the accessibility control affordance is detected, is satisfied by the input associated with the accessibility control affordance; 152. The method of any one of claims 149 to 151, comprising:

153. the control panel user interface displays a TV remote control affordance; The method comprises: detecting an input associated with the TV remote control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the TV remote control affordance while displaying the TV remote control affordance within the control panel user interface; In response to detecting the input associated with the TV remote control affordance, displaying a navigation area for navigating a focus selector according to movement of contact on the touch-sensitive surface according to a determination that a control expansion criterion is satisfied by the input associated with the TV remote control affordance; displaying a user interface of an application corresponding to the TV remote control affordance according to determining that a feature activation criterion is satisfied by the input associated with the TV remote control affordance; 153. The method of any one of claims 149 to 152, comprising:

154. the control panel user interface displays a text size control affordance; The method comprises: While displaying the text size control affordance within the control panel user interface, detecting an input associated with the text size control affordance that satisfies a control enlargement criterion; In response to detecting the input associated with the text size control affordance that satisfies the control enlargement criterion, displaying a first set of selectable options corresponding to the text size control affordance in accordance with determining that an associated toggle control function of the text size control affordance is in a first state; displaying a second set of selectable options corresponding to the text size control affordance, separate from the first set of selectable options, in accordance with determining that the associated toggle control function of the text size control affordance is in a second state; and 154. The method of any one of claims 149 to 153, comprising:

155. the control panel user interface displays a low power mode control affordance; The method comprises: detecting an input associated with the low power mode control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the low power mode control affordance while displaying the low power mode control affordance within the control panel user interface; In response to detecting the input associated with the low power mode control affordance, displaying a respective configuration user interface for controlling a power mode of the electronic device in accordance with a determination that the input associated with the low power mode control affordance satisfies a control escalation criterion; and toggling a state of the power mode of the electronic device according to a determination that the input associated with the low power mode control affordance satisfies a control toggle criterion; 155. The method of any one of claims 149 to 154, comprising:

156. the control panel user interface displays an automobile mode control affordance; when the automobile mode control affordance is in a first state, a first set of functions is provided on a lock screen user interface of the electronic device; 156. The method of any one of claims 149 to 155, wherein when the automobile mode control affordance is in a second state, a second set of functions is provided on the lock screen user interface of the electronic device, the second set of functions including the first set of functions and one or more additional functions that are not available on the lock screen user interface when the automobile mode control affordance is in the first state.

157. the control panel user interface displays a do not disturb mode control affordance; The method comprises: detecting an input associated with the do not disturb mode control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the do not disturb mode control affordance while displaying the do not disturb mode control affordance within the control panel user interface; In response to detecting the input associated with the do not disturb mode control affordance, displaying a plurality of selectable options corresponding to a do not disturb mode of the electronic device in accordance with a determination that the input associated with the do not disturb mode control affordance satisfies a control expansion criterion; and toggling a state of the do not disturb mode of the electronic device in accordance with a determination that the input associated with the do not disturb mode control affordance satisfies a control toggle criterion; 157. The method of any one of claims 149 to 156, comprising:

158. the control panel user interface displays a WiFi connection control affordance; The method comprises: detecting an input associated with the WiFi connection control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the WiFi connection control affordance while displaying the WiFi connection control affordance within the control panel user interface; In response to detecting the input associated with the WiFi connection control affordance, displaying a plurality of selectable options corresponding to a WiFi connection of the electronic device in accordance with a determination that the input associated with the WiFi connection control affordance satisfies a control expansion criterion; and toggling a state of the WiFi connection of the electronic device according to a determination that the input associated with the WiFi connection control affordance satisfies a control toggle criterion; 158. The method of any one of claims 149 to 157, comprising:

159. the control panel user interface displays a Bluetooth connection control affordance; The method comprises: detecting an input associated with the Bluetooth connection control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the Bluetooth connection control affordance while displaying the Bluetooth connection control affordance within the control panel user interface; In response to detecting the input associated with the Bluetooth connection control affordance, displaying a plurality of selectable options corresponding to a Bluetooth connection of the electronic device in accordance with determining that the input associated with the Bluetooth connection control affordance satisfies a control expansion criterion; and toggling a state of the Bluetooth connection of the electronic device according to a determination that the input associated with the Bluetooth connection control affordance satisfies a control toggle criterion; 159. The method of any one of claims 149 to 158, comprising:

160. the control panel user interface displays an airplane mode control affordance that, when activated by an input that meets a control toggle criterion, toggles an airplane mode ON / OFF state of the electronic device; The method comprises: While the airplane mode is off at a first time, detecting a first input associated with the airplane mode control affordance that turns on the airplane mode using the airplane mode control affordance; in response to detecting the first input associated with the airplane mode control affordance that turns on the airplane mode, turning on the airplane mode including disabling a first set of network connections associated with the airplane mode; detecting one or more modifying inputs that selectively enable a first subset of the first set of network connections while the airplane mode is on as a result of the first input associated with the airplane mode control affordance; After detecting the one or more corrective inputs, detecting a second input associated with the airplane mode control affordance that turns off the airplane mode; and turning off the airplane mode, including enabling a second subset of the first set of network connections, separate from the first subset of the first set of network connections, in response to detecting the second input associated with the airplane mode control affordance; While the airplane mode is off at a second time as a result of the second input associated with the airplane mode control affordance, detecting a third input associated with the airplane mode control affordance that turns on the airplane mode using the airplane mode control affordance; in response to detecting the third input associated with the airplane mode control affordance that turns on the airplane mode, turning on the airplane mode, including disabling the second subset of the first set of network connections without disabling the first subset of the first set of network connections; 160. The method of any one of claims 149 to 159, comprising:

161. the control panel user interface displays a screen recording control affordance; The method comprises: detecting an input associated with the screen record control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the screen record control affordance while displaying the screen record control affordance within the control panel user interface; In response to detecting the input associated with the screen recording control affordance, displaying a plurality of selectable options corresponding to a screen recording function of the electronic device in accordance with a determination that the input associated with the screen recording control affordance satisfies a control expansion criterion; and toggling a start / stop state of the screen recording function of the electronic device according to a determination that the input associated with the screen recording control affordance satisfies a control toggle criterion; 161. The method of any one of claims 149 to 160, comprising:

162. the control panel user interface displays hearing aid control affordances; The method comprises: detecting an input associated with the hearing aid control affordance, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the hearing aid control affordance, while displaying the hearing aid control affordance within the control panel user interface; In response to detecting the input associated with the hearing aid control affordance, displaying a plurality of selectable options corresponding to hearing aid functionality of the electronic device in accordance with a determination that the input associated with the hearing aid control affordance satisfies a control expansion criterion; and toggling a state of a hearing aid device coupled to the electronic device in accordance with a determination that the input associated with the hearing aid control affordance satisfies a control toggle criterion; 162. The method of any one of claims 149 to 161, comprising:

163. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising: Displaying a first user interface on the display; detecting a first input while displaying the first user interface; in response to detecting the first input, a control panel user interface in a first configuration, the control panel user interface in the first configuration includes a first set of control affordances in a first region of the control panel user interface that correspond to respective functions of the device; a first subset of the first set of control affordances is not user-configurable, and a second subset of the first set of control affordances is user-configurable; Displaying a control panel user interface in a first configuration; detecting a second input after displaying the control panel user interface in the first configuration; In response to detecting the second input, a control panel configuration user interface, The control panel configuration user interface includes: a representation of the second subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state without displaying the first subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state; and a representation of a second set of control affordances distinct from the first set of control affordances in an unselected state, wherein control affordances corresponding to the representation of the second set of control affordances are not included in the control panel user interface in the first configuration; and Displaying Display the Control Panel Settings user interface, detecting one or more configuration inputs while displaying the control panel configuration user interface, including detecting a third input that changes a selection state for a representation of a first control affordance in the second set of control affordances from the unselected state to the selected state; detecting a fourth input after detecting the third input that changes the selection state for the representation of the first control affordance from the unselected state to the selected state; in response to detecting the fourth input, displaying the control panel user interface in a second configuration distinct from the first configuration, the control panel user interface in the second configuration including the first control affordance within the first region of the control panel user interface. An electronic device containing instructions.

164. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to: displaying a first user interface on the display; detecting a first input while displaying the first user interface; in response to detecting the first input, a control panel user interface in a first configuration, the control panel user interface in the first configuration includes a first set of control affordances in a first region of the control panel user interface that correspond to respective functions of the device; a first subset of the first set of control affordances is not user-configurable, and a second subset of the first set of control affordances is user-configurable; displaying a control panel user interface in a first configuration; detecting a second input after displaying the control panel user interface in the first configuration; In response to detecting the second input, a control panel configuration user interface, The control panel configuration user interface includes: a representation of the second subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state without displaying the first subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state; and a representation of a second set of control affordances distinct from the first set of control affordances in an unselected state, wherein control affordances corresponding to the representation of the second set of control affordances are not included in the control panel user interface in the first configuration; and Displaying Display the control panel settings user interface, detecting one or more configuration inputs while displaying the control panel configuration user interface, including detecting a third input that changes a selection state for a representation of a first control affordance in the second set of control affordances from the unselected state to the selected state; detecting a fourth input after detecting the third input that changes the selection state for the representation of the first control affordance from the unselected state to the selected state; in response to detecting the fourth input, displaying the control panel user interface in a second configuration distinct from the first configuration, the control panel user interface in the second configuration including the first control affordance within the first region of the control panel user interface. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium containing instructions.

165. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and means for displaying a first user interface on the display; means for detecting a first input while displaying the first user interface; means for displaying a control panel user interface in a first configuration in response to detecting the first input, the control panel user interface in the first configuration includes a first set of control affordances in a first region of the control panel user interface that correspond to respective functions of the device; a first subset of the first set of control affordances is not user-configurable, and a second subset of the first set of control affordances is user-configurable; Means and means for detecting a second input after displaying the control panel user interface in the first configuration; means for displaying a control panel setting user interface in response to detecting the second input, The control panel configuration user interface includes: a representation of the second subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state without displaying the first subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state; and a representation of a second set of control affordances distinct from the first set of control affordances in an unselected state, wherein control affordances corresponding to the representation of the second set of control affordances are not included in the control panel user interface in the first configuration; and and a means for displaying the means for detecting one or more configuration inputs, including detecting a third input that changes a selection state for a representation of a first control affordance in the second set of control affordances from the unselected state to the selected state while displaying the control panel configuration user interface; means for detecting a fourth input after detecting the third input that changes the selection state for the representation of the first control affordance from the unselected state to the selected state; means for displaying the control panel user interface in a second configuration distinct from the first configuration in response to detecting the fourth input, the control panel user interface in the second configuration including the first control affordance in the first region of the control panel user interface; An electronic device comprising:

166. 1. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, comprising: means for displaying a first user interface on the display; means for detecting a first input while displaying the first user interface; means for displaying a control panel user interface in a first configuration in response to detecting the first input, the control panel user interface in the first configuration includes a first set of control affordances in a first region of the control panel user interface that correspond to respective functions of the device; a first subset of the first set of control affordances is not user-configurable, and a second subset of the first set of control affordances is user-configurable; Means and means for detecting a second input after displaying the control panel user interface in the first configuration; means for displaying a control panel setting user interface in response to detecting the second input, The control panel configuration user interface includes: a representation of the second subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state without displaying the first subset of the first set of control affordances in a selected state; and a representation of a second set of control affordances distinct from the first set of control affordances in an unselected state, wherein control affordances corresponding to the representation of the second set of control affordances are not included in the control panel user interface in the first configuration; and and a means for displaying the means for detecting one or more configuration inputs, including detecting a third input that changes a selection state for a representation of a first control affordance in the second set of control affordances from the unselected state to the selected state while displaying the control panel configuration user interface; means for detecting a fourth input after detecting the third input that changes the selection state for the representation of the first control affordance from the unselected state to the selected state; means for displaying the control panel user interface in a second configuration distinct from the first configuration in response to detecting the fourth input, the control panel user interface in the second configuration including the first control affordance in the first region of the control panel user interface; An information processing device comprising:

167. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 149 to 162.

168. 163. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform any of the methods of claims 149-162.

169. 163. A graphical user interface on an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors executing one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising a user interface displayed according to any of the methods of claims 149-162.

170. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and means for carrying out any of the methods of claims 149 to 162; An electronic device comprising:

171. 163. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, the information processing apparatus comprising means for performing any of the methods of claims 149 to 162.

172. In an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, displaying a first user interface on the display, the first user interface including a slider control, the slider control comprising: an indication of each of a plurality of control values ​​for a control function corresponding to the slider control, the control value including a maximum value, a minimum value, and one or more intermediate values ​​between the maximum and minimum values; an indicator indicating a currently selected control value among the plurality of control values; and detecting a contact input, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the slider control in the first user interface while displaying the slider control; In response to detecting the input by the contact, pursuant to a determination that the input satisfies a control adjustment criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that the contact be detected across the touch-sensitive surface with a movement greater than a threshold movement, changing a position of the indicator to indicate an update to the currently selected control value among the plurality of control values ​​in accordance with the movement of the contact; toggling the control function corresponding to the slider control in accordance with determining that the input satisfies a slider toggle criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that lift-off of the contact be detected across the touch-sensitive surface with the contact having less than a threshold amount of movement; A method comprising:

173. 173. The method of claim 172, wherein toggling the control function corresponding to the slider control comprises toggling the currently selected control value between the maximum and minimum values ​​of the plurality of control values.

174. 173. The method of claim 172, wherein toggling the control function corresponding to the slider control comprises toggling between two states without changing the currently selected control value.

175. the slider control is a volume control; the currently selected control value is a currently selected volume value in a range of volume values ​​between a maximum volume and a minimum volume; 173. The method of claim 172, wherein toggling the control function corresponding to the slider control comprises toggling the volume between an ON state and an OFF state.

176. the slider control is a volume control that separately controls a volume for a first type of audio output and a volume for a second type of audio output; displaying the slider control includes displaying a first plurality of volume values ​​for the first type of audio output and a first indicator indicating a currently selected volume value for the first type of audio output; 173. The method of claim 172, wherein toggling the control function corresponding to the slider control comprises toggling a display of the first plurality of volume values ​​and the first indicator for the first type of audio output to a display of a second plurality of volume values ​​for the second type of audio output and a second indicator showing a currently selected volume value for the second type of audio output.

177. the slider control is a brightness control; the currently selected control value is a currently selected brightness value in a range of brightness values ​​between maximum brightness and brightness; 173. The method of claim 172, wherein toggling the control function corresponding to the slider control comprises toggling between a first brightness mode and a second brightness mode.

178. In response to detecting the input by the contact, 178. The method of claim 177, comprising displaying a zoomed view of the control affordance including toggle controls for adjusting the brightness control having the range of brightness values ​​and other display settings in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a control magnification criterion.

179. the slider control is simultaneously displayed with an indicator having an appearance corresponding to the current toggle state of the control function; A method according to any one of claims 172 to 178, wherein the method comprises changing the appearance of the indicator in accordance with a change in the toggle state of the control function.

180. Displaying the slider control within the first user interface includes: displaying the slider control at a first vertical extent in accordance with determining that the first user interface is a user interface in a landscape orientation; displaying the slider control with a second vertical extent that is less than the first vertical extent in accordance with determining that the first user interface is a user interface in a portrait orientation state; 180. The method of any one of claims 172 to 179, comprising:

181. the slider control is a timer; the currently selected control value is the current amount of time remaining for the timer; Displaying the slider control continuously changing the position of the indicator to indicate updates to a current amount of time remaining for the timer over time in accordance with determining that the toggle state of the timer is in a first state; maintaining the position of the indicator over time in accordance with determining that the toggle state of the timer is in a second state; and Changing the position of the indicator to indicate an update to the currently selected control value in accordance with the movement of the contact comprises: disabling the updates to the current amount of time remaining for the timer over time when changing the position of the indicator in accordance with the movement of the contact in accordance with determining that the toggle state of the timer is in the first state; changing the position of the indicator from the currently selected control value in accordance with the movement of the contact in accordance with determining that the toggle state of the timer is in the second state; 173. The method of claim 172, comprising:

182. displaying a second user interface on the display before displaying the first user interface, the second user interface having a first appearance; displaying a first user interface including the slider control overlaid on the second user interface; In response to changing the position of the indicator corresponding to the slider control, visualizing at least a portion of the second user interface overlaid by the first user interface; modifying an appearance of at least the visualized portion of the second user interface in accordance with the change in the position of the indicator while maintaining a display of less than all of the first user interface, including the slider control; 182. The method of any one of claims 172 to 181, comprising:

183. In response to detecting the input by the contact, when the input satisfies a control adjustment criterion; upon determining that the input is an input on a control that changes the appearance of a user interface displayed on the device, changing a position of the indicator to indicate an update to the currently selected control value among the plurality of control values ​​in accordance with the movement of the contact and ceasing to display a respective portion of the first user interface; responsive to determining that the input is an input on a control that does not change the appearance of the user interface displayed on the device, changing a position of the indicator to indicate an update to the currently selected control value among the plurality of control values ​​in accordance with the movement of the contact while maintaining display of the respective portion of the first user interface; 183. The method of claim 182, comprising:

184. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising: a slider control displayed on the display within a first user interface, an indication of each of a plurality of control values ​​for a control function corresponding to the slider control, the control value including a maximum value, a minimum value, and one or more intermediate values ​​between the maximum and minimum values; an indicator marking a currently selected control value among the plurality of control values; Displaying a first user interface including a slider control; detecting a contact input, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the slider control in the first user interface while displaying the slider control; In response to detecting the input by the contact, pursuant to a determination that the input satisfies a control adjustment criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that the contact be detected across the touch-sensitive surface with a movement greater than a threshold movement, changing a position of the indicator to indicate an update to the currently selected control value among the plurality of control values ​​in accordance with the movement of the contact; toggling the control function corresponding to the slider control in accordance with determining that the input satisfies a slider toggle criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that lift-off of the contact be detected across the touch-sensitive surface with the contact having a movement less than the threshold movement. An electronic device containing instructions.

185. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to: a slider control displayed on the display within a first user interface, an indication of each of a plurality of control values ​​for a control function corresponding to the slider control, the control value including a maximum value, a minimum value, and one or more intermediate values ​​between the maximum and minimum values; an indicator marking a currently selected control value among said plurality of control values; displaying a first user interface including a slider control, detecting a contact input, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the slider control in the first user interface while displaying the slider control; In response to detecting the input by the contact, responsive to a determination that the input satisfies a control adjustment criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that the contact be detected across the touch-sensitive surface with a movement greater than a threshold movement, changing a position of the indicator to indicate an update to the currently selected control value among the plurality of control values ​​responsive to the movement of the contact; toggling the control function corresponding to the slider control pursuant to determining that the input satisfies a slider toggle criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that lift-off of the contact be detected across the touch-sensitive surface with the contact having a movement less than the threshold movement. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium containing instructions.

186. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and means for displaying a first user interface on the display, the first user interface including a slider control, the slider control comprising: an indication of each of a plurality of control values ​​for a control function corresponding to the slider control, the control value including a maximum value, a minimum value, and one or more intermediate values ​​between the maximum and minimum values; an indicator marking a currently selected control value among said plurality of control values; Including, Means and means for detecting the contact input, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the slider control in the first user interface while displaying the slider control; In response to detecting the input by the contact, means for changing a position of the indicator to indicate an update to the currently selected control value among the plurality of control values ​​in accordance with the movement of the contact in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a control adjustment criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that the contact be detected across the touch-sensitive surface with a movement greater than a threshold movement; means for toggling the control function corresponding to the slider control in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a slider toggle criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that lift-off of the contact be detected across the touch-sensitive surface with the contact having a movement less than the threshold movement; An electronic device comprising:

187. 1. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, comprising: means for displaying a first user interface on the display, the first user interface including a slider control, the slider control comprising: an indication of each of a plurality of control values ​​for a control function corresponding to the slider control, the control value including a maximum value, a minimum value, and one or more intermediate values ​​between the maximum and minimum values; an indicator marking a currently selected control value among said plurality of control values; a means for means for detecting the contact input, including detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location corresponding to the slider control in the first user interface while displaying the slider control; In response to detecting the input by the contact, means for changing a position of the indicator to indicate an update to the currently selected control value among the plurality of control values ​​in accordance with the movement of the contact in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a control adjustment criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that the contact be detected across the touch-sensitive surface with a movement greater than a threshold movement; means for toggling the control function corresponding to the slider control in accordance with a determination that the input satisfies a slider toggle criterion that, to be satisfied, requires that lift-off of the contact be detected across the touch-sensitive surface with the contact having a movement less than the threshold movement; An information processing device comprising:

188. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 172 to 183.

189. 184. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform any of the methods of claims 172-183.

190. 184. A graphical user interface on an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors executing one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising a user interface displayed according to any of the methods of claims 172-183.

191. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and means for carrying out any of the methods of claims 172 to 183; An electronic device comprising:

192. 184. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, the information processing apparatus comprising means for performing any of the methods of claims 172-183.

193. In an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, displaying, on the display, a first user interface including one or more applications displayed without displaying a dock; Detecting a series of one or more inputs, including detecting a movement of a contact from an edge of the device onto the device while displaying the first user interface; in response to detecting the series of one or more inputs; displaying the dock overlaid on the first user interface without displaying a control panel in accordance with a determination that the series of one or more inputs meets dock display criteria; displaying the control panel in accordance with a determination that the series of one or more inputs meets a control panel display criterion; A method comprising:

194. the series of one or more inputs includes movement of respective contacts from the end of the device onto the device, the respective contacts being detected consecutively throughout the series of one or more inputs; the dock display criteria include a criterion that is met when the movement of the respective contact is greater than a first distance threshold; 194. The method of claim 193, wherein the control panel display criteria include criteria that are met when the movement of the respective contact is greater than a second distance threshold that is greater than the first distance threshold.

195. the dock display criteria include criteria that are met when the series of one or more inputs includes a movement of a first contact from the edge of the device onto the device; 194. The method of claim 193, wherein the control panel display criteria include criteria that are met when the series of one or more inputs includes a movement of an initial contact from the edge of the device onto the device followed by a movement of a second contact from the edge of the device onto the device.

196. 200. The method of claim 195, wherein the control panel display criteria include criteria that are met when the movement of the second contact is detected while displaying the dock on the display.

197. detecting a subsequent input comprising a movement of a second contact from the edge of the device onto the device while the dock is overlaid on the first user interface without simultaneously displaying the control panel; displaying the control panel in response to detecting the subsequent input; 197. The method of any one of claims 193 and 195-196, comprising:

198. the dock display criteria include criteria that are satisfied by an initial portion of the series of one or more inputs that satisfy the control panel display criteria; A method according to any one of claims 193 to 197, wherein the dock is displayed in response to the initial part of the series of one or more inputs.

199. in response to detecting the series of one or more inputs; A method according to any one of claims 193 to 198, comprising ceasing to display the dock when displaying the control panel in accordance with a determination that the dock is currently displayed and that the control panel will be displayed.

200. in response to detecting the series of one or more inputs; 200. A method according to any one of claims 193 to 198, comprising maintaining the display of the dock when displaying the control panel in accordance with a determination that the dock is currently displayed and that the control panel will be displayed.

201. Displaying the control panel The method of any one of claims 193 to 200, comprising displaying the control panel with multiple application views in an application switcher user interface.

202. 202. The method of claim 201, comprising displaying an animated transition of the application switcher user interface replacing the display of the first user interface while maintaining the display of the dock.

203. 202. The method of claim 201, comprising displaying an animated transition of the application switcher user interface replacing the display of the first user interface and the dock.

204. Detecting a second series of one or more inputs that satisfy an application closure criterion while displaying the application switcher user interface; ceasing to display a first application view of the plurality of application views within the application switcher user interface in response to detecting the second series of one or more inputs that satisfy the application closure criteria; 204. The method of any one of claims 201 to 203, comprising:

205. Detecting the second series of one or more inputs that satisfy the application closure criteria includes: detecting a first input that activates an application close mode of the application switcher user interface; detecting a second input selecting the first application view among the plurality of application views while the application close mode of the application switcher user interface is activated; wherein the method comprises:

205. The method of claim 204, comprising, in response to detecting the first input that activates the application close mode of the application switcher user interface, displaying a first visual change in the application switcher user interface to indicate that the application close mode has been activated.

206. 206. The method of claim 201, wherein detecting the second series of one or more inputs that satisfy the application closure criteria comprises detecting movement of each contact in the second series of one or more inputs across the touch-sensitive surface at a position corresponding to the first application view of the plurality of application views.

207. the dock is displayed as an overlay on the first user interface pursuant to a determination that the series of one or more inputs meets the dock display criteria and the first user interface is not protected when the series of one or more inputs is detected; The method comprises: in response to detecting the series of one or more inputs; A method according to any one of claims 193 to 206, comprising maintaining display of the first user interface without displaying the dock in accordance with a determination that the series of one or more inputs meets the dock display criteria and the first user interface is protected.

208. The dock is (1) a first application start icon moved by a user from a home screen user interface of the device to the dock; (2) a second application start icon for a recently opened application on the device; and (3) a third application launch icon for an application recommended by the device based on predetermined criteria; and The method of any one of claims 193 to 207, comprising a plurality of application start icons including at least one of:

209. detecting a fourth contact input on the touch-sensitive surface at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to a first selectable control of the one or more selectable controls while displaying the control panel, the control panel including one or more selectable controls; In response to detecting the input by the fourth contact, replacing the representation of the first selectable control with a representation of a first expanded control corresponding to the first selectable control in accordance with a determination that the input from the fourth contact satisfies expanded control display criteria; The method of any one of claims 193 to 208, comprising:

210. Detecting a request to display a cover sheet user interface; displaying the coversheet user interface in response to detecting the request to display the coversheet user interface; detecting a fifth contact input, including detecting a fifth contact movement from the edge of the device onto the device while displaying the cover sheet user interface; In response to detecting the input by the fifth contact, displaying the control panel in response to a determination that the request to display the cover sheet user interface was detected when the device was in a display-off state; replacing a display of the coversheet user interface with a display of the respective user interface pursuant to a determination that the request to display the coversheet user interface was detected when the device was displaying the respective user interface; 210. The method of any one of claims 193 to 209, comprising:

211. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising: displaying, on the display, a first user interface including one or more applications displayed without displaying a dock; detecting a series of one or more inputs, including detecting a movement of a contact from an edge of the device onto the device while displaying the first user interface; in response to detecting the series of one or more inputs; displaying the dock overlaid on the first user interface without displaying a control panel in accordance with a determination that the series of one or more inputs meets dock display criteria; displaying the control panel in accordance with a determination that the series of one or more inputs meets a control panel display criterion. An electronic device containing instructions.

212. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to: displaying, on the display, a first user interface including one or more applications displayed without displaying a dock; detecting a series of one or more inputs, including detecting a movement of a contact from an edge of the device onto the device while displaying the first user interface; in response to detecting the series of one or more inputs; displaying the dock overlaid on the first user interface without displaying a control panel in accordance with determining that the series of one or more inputs meets dock display criteria; displaying the control panel in accordance with a determination that the series of one or more inputs satisfies a control panel display criterion. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium containing instructions.

213. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and means for displaying, on the display, a first user interface including one or more applications displayed without displaying a dock; means for detecting a series of one or more inputs, enabled while displaying the first user interface, including detecting a movement of a contact onto the device from an edge of the device; enabled in response to detecting the series of one or more inputs. means for displaying the dock overlaid on the first user interface without displaying a control panel, the means being enabled in accordance with a determination that the series of one or more inputs meets dock display criteria; means for displaying the control panel, the control panel being enabled in accordance with a determination that the series of one or more inputs meets a control panel display criterion; a means for An electronic device comprising:

214. 1. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, comprising: means for displaying, on the display, a first user interface including one or more applications displayed without displaying a dock; means for detecting a series of one or more inputs, enabled while displaying the first user interface, including detecting a movement of a contact onto the device from an edge of the device; enabled in response to detecting the series of one or more inputs. means for displaying the dock overlaid on the first user interface without displaying a control panel, the means being enabled in accordance with a determination that the series of one or more inputs meets dock display criteria; means for displaying the control panel, the control panel being enabled in accordance with a determination that the series of one or more inputs meets a control panel display criterion; a means for An information processing device comprising:

215. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 193 to 210.

216. 211. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform any of the methods of claims 193-210.

217. 211. A graphical user interface on an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors executing one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising a user interface displayed according to any of the methods of claims 193-210.

218. The display and a touch-sensitive surface; and one or more processors; Memory and means for carrying out any of the methods of claims 193 to 210; An electronic device comprising:

219. 211. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, the information processing apparatus comprising means for performing any of the methods of claims 193 to 210.

220. In an electronic device having one or more input devices, detecting an input via the one or more input devices; entering a transitional user interface mode in which a plurality of different user interface states are available to be selected based on a comparison of a set of one or more characteristics of the input to a corresponding set of one or more thresholds while the input continues to be detected via the one or more input devices; detecting, while in the transitional user interface mode, a gesture including a first change in one or more respective properties in the set of one or more properties of the input followed by an end of the input; In response to detecting the gesture, selecting a final state for the user interface based on one or more values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in accordance with determining that the end of the input was detected with a first temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input; selecting a final state for the user interface based on the one or more values ​​for the set of one or more characteristics of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more second values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in accordance with determining that the end of the input was detected with a second temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective characteristics of the input; A method comprising:

221. 221. The method of claim 220, wherein the detected gesture satisfies a corresponding threshold that was not met by the set of one or more properties of the input before the first change.

222. 222. A method according to any one of claims 220 to 221, wherein the one or more second values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds are selected based on a period of time following satisfaction of a predetermined condition.

223. A method according to any one of claims 220 to 222, wherein the corresponding threshold satisfied by the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input is a position threshold.

224. A method according to any one of claims 220 to 222, wherein the corresponding threshold satisfied by the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input is a velocity threshold.

225. A method according to any one of claims 220 to 223, wherein the set of one or more thresholds includes a position threshold.

226. A method according to any one of claims 220 to 225, wherein the set of one or more thresholds includes a velocity threshold.

227. the set of one or more thresholds includes a position threshold and a velocity threshold; a respective first value for the position threshold at the one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds is the same as a respective second value for the position threshold at the one or more second values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds; A method according to any one of claims 220 to 223, wherein each first value for the speed threshold in the one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds is different from each second value for the speed threshold in the one or more second values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds.

228. the set of one or more thresholds includes a position threshold and a velocity threshold; a respective first value for the velocity threshold in the one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds is the same as a respective second value for the velocity threshold in the one or more second values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds; A method according to any one of claims 220 to 223, wherein each first value for the position threshold in the one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds is different from each second value for the position threshold in the one or more second values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds.

229. 229. A method according to any one of claims 220 to 228, wherein the one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds are selected based on a previous change in one or more respective properties in the set of one or more properties.

230. selecting a final state for the user interface based on one or more values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds; selecting the one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds based on the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input; comparing the selected one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more threshold values ​​with the one or more values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input corresponding to the end of the input; 230. The method of any one of claims 220 to 229, comprising:

231. after detecting the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input and before detecting the end of the input; detecting a second change in one or more respective properties in the set of one or more properties of the input such that the input no longer satisfies the corresponding threshold that was met by the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input; In response to detecting the end of the input, selecting a final state for the user interface based on one or more values ​​for the set of one or more characteristics of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more third values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in accordance with determining that the end of the input was detected with the first temporal proximity to the second change in the one or more respective characteristics of the input; selecting a final state for the user interface based on the one or more values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input corresponding to the end of the input and the one or more fourth values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in accordance with determining that the end of the input was detected with the second temporal proximity to the second change in the one or more respective properties of the input; 231. The method of any one of claims 220 to 230, further comprising:

232. 232. The method of any one of claims 220 to 231, further comprising updating one or more respective thresholds in the corresponding set of one or more thresholds after detecting the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input and before detecting the end of the input.

233. 233. The method of claim 232, wherein the one or more respective thresholds in the corresponding set of one or more thresholds are updated based on temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input.

234. A method according to any one of claims 232 to 233, wherein the one or more respective thresholds in the corresponding set of one or more thresholds are dynamically updated based on changing temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input.

235. after detecting the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input and before detecting the end of the input; monitoring the set of one or more properties of the input; periodically selecting a final state for the user interface based on the monitored set of one or more properties of the input and previously determined values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds; updating one or more values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more threshold values ​​based on the selected final state for the user interface; 235. The method of any one of claims 220 to 234, further comprising:

236. 236. The method of claim 235, wherein the one or more values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds are updated to increase the difference between the one or more thresholds and the values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input that correspond to the end of the input.

237. A method according to any one of claims 220 to 236, wherein at least one respective threshold in said set of one or more thresholds has a predefined maximum threshold.

238. the plurality of different states include a home state and an application switcher state; the selection between the control panel state and the last application state is based at least in part on a movement threshold, the movement threshold being one of the one or more of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds; the final state of the user interface is the application switcher state when the nature of the input satisfies application switcher indication criteria, the indication criteria including a requirement that the indication criteria be satisfied when the movement of the contact exceeds the movement threshold; 238. The method of any one of claims 220 to 237, wherein the final state of the user interface is the home state when the nature of the input satisfies home indication criteria, the home indication criteria including a requirement that is met when the movement of the contact is below the movement threshold.

239. the plurality of different states includes a home state and a final application state; the selection between the home state and the last application state is based at least in part on a directional condition determined based on one or more of the corresponding sets of one or more thresholds; the final state of the user interface is the final application state when the nature of the input satisfies final application display criteria, including a requirement that is met when the movement of the contact satisfies the directional condition; 239. The method of any one of claims 220 to 238, wherein the final state of the user interface is the home state when the nature of the input satisfies home indication criteria, including requirements that are met when the movement of the contact does not satisfy the directional condition.

240. the plurality of different states includes a control panel state and a last application state; the selection between the control panel state and the last application state is based at least in part on a directional condition determined based on one or more of the corresponding sets of one or more thresholds; the final state of the user interface is the final application state when the nature of the input satisfies final application display criteria, including a requirement that is met when the movement of the contact satisfies the directional condition; 240. The method of any one of claims 220 to 239, wherein the final state of the user interface is the control panel state when the nature of the input satisfies control panel display criteria, including requirements that are satisfied when the movement of the contact does not satisfy the directional condition.

241. Selecting the final state for the user interface comprises: selecting a first final state for the user interface in accordance with a determination that the one or more values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input corresponding to the end of the input satisfy a first respective threshold in the corresponding set of one or more thresholds; selecting a second final state for the user interface that is different from the first final state for the user interface in accordance with a determination that the one or more values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input corresponding to the end of the input do not satisfy a first respective threshold in the corresponding set of one or more thresholds; 241. The method of any one of claims 220 to 240, comprising:

242. one or more input devices; one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising: detecting input via the one or more input devices; entering a transitional user interface mode in which a plurality of different user interface states are available to be selected based on a comparison of a set of one or more properties of the input to a corresponding set of one or more thresholds while the input continues to be detected via the one or more input devices; detecting, while in the transitional user interface mode, a gesture including a first change in one or more respective properties in the set of one or more properties of the input followed by an end of the input; In response to detecting the gesture, selecting a final state for the user interface based on one or more values ​​for the set of one or more characteristics of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in response to determining that the end of the input was detected with a first temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective characteristics of the input; selecting a final state for the user interface based on the one or more values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more second values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in accordance with determining that the end of the input was detected with a second temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input. An electronic device containing instructions.

243. 1. A computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs, the one or more programs, when executed by an electronic device having one or more input devices, causing the device to: detecting an input via the one or more input devices; causing a transitional user interface mode to be entered in which a plurality of different user interface states are available to be selected based on a comparison of a set of one or more characteristics of the input to a corresponding set of one or more thresholds while the input continues to be detected via the one or more input devices; detecting, while in the transitional user interface mode, a gesture including a first change in one or more respective properties in the set of one or more properties of the input followed by an end of the input; In response to detecting the gesture, selecting a final state for the user interface based on one or more values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in accordance with determining that the end of the input was detected with a first temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input; selecting a final state for the user interface based on the one or more values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more second values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in accordance with determining that the end of the input was detected with a second temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input. A computer-readable storage medium containing instructions.

244. 1. A graphical user interface on an electronic device having one or more input devices, a memory, and one or more processors executing one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising: Rendering from a first application; an input is detected via the one or more input devices; entering a transitional user interface mode in which a plurality of different user interface states are available to be selected based on a comparison of a set of one or more properties of the input to a corresponding set of one or more thresholds while the input continues to be detected via the one or more input devices; While in the transitional user interface mode, a gesture is detected that includes a first change in one or more respective properties in the set of one or more properties of the input followed by an end of the input; In response to detecting the gesture, pursuant to determining that the end of the input was detected with a first temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective characteristics of the input, selecting a final state for the user interface based on one or more values ​​for the set of one or more characteristics of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds; pursuant to determining that the end of the input was detected with a second temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective characteristics of the input, a final state for the user interface is selected based on the one or more values ​​for the set of one or more characteristics of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more second values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds. Graphical user interface.

245. one or more input devices; means for detecting input via said one or more input devices; means for entering a transitional user interface mode, wherein a plurality of different user interface states are available to be selected based on a comparison of a set of one or more characteristics of the input to a corresponding set of one or more thresholds while the input continues to be detected via the one or more input devices; means for detecting, while in the transitional user interface mode, a gesture including a first change in one or more respective properties in the set of one or more properties of the input followed by an end of the input; In response to detecting the gesture, selecting a final state for the user interface based on one or more values ​​for the set of one or more characteristics of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in response to determining that the end of the input was detected with a first temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective characteristics of the input; selecting a final state for the user interface based on the one or more values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more second values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in accordance with determining that the end of the input was detected with a second temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input. Means and An electronic device comprising:

246. 1. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having one or more input devices, comprising: means for detecting input via said one or more input devices; means for entering a transitional user interface mode, wherein a plurality of different user interface states are available to be selected based on a comparison of a set of one or more characteristics of the input to a corresponding set of one or more thresholds while the input continues to be detected via the one or more input devices; means for detecting, while in the transitional user interface mode, a gesture including a first change in one or more respective properties in the set of one or more properties of the input followed by an end of the input; In response to detecting the gesture, selecting a final state for the user interface based on one or more values ​​for the set of one or more characteristics of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more first values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in response to determining that the end of the input was detected with a first temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective characteristics of the input; selecting a final state for the user interface based on the one or more values ​​for the set of one or more properties of the input corresponding to the end of the input and one or more second values ​​of the corresponding set of one or more thresholds in accordance with determining that the end of the input was detected with a second temporal proximity to the first change in the one or more respective properties of the input. Means and An information processing device comprising:

247. one or more input devices; one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 220 to 241.

248. 242. A computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device having one or more input devices, cause the device to perform any of the methods of claims 220 to 241.

249. 242. A graphical user interface on an electronic device having one or more input devices, a memory, and one or more processors executing one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising a user interface displayed according to any of the methods of claims 220 to 241.

250. one or more input devices; means for carrying out any of the methods of claims 220 to 241; An electronic device comprising:

251. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having one or more input devices, the information processing apparatus comprising means for performing any of the methods of claims 220 to 241.

252. In an electronic device having a touch-sensitive display, Detecting a first swipe gesture in a respective direction from a first end of the touch-sensitive display; in response to detecting the first swipe gesture from the first end of the touch-sensitive display, displaying a plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display in accordance with determining that respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred at a first portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display; displaying a plurality of recently received notifications in accordance with determining that the respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred at a second portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display; A method comprising:

253. 253. The method of claim 252, wherein the first portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display is smaller than the second portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display.

254. Prior to detecting the first swipe gesture, one or more state indicators are displayed within the first portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display, and the method further comprises: in response to detecting the first swipe gesture from the first end of the touch-sensitive display, 254. The method of claim 252, further comprising: modifying a position of the one or more status indicators in accordance with the movement of the first swipe gesture away from the edge of the touch-sensitive display in accordance with determining that a respective portion of the first swipe gesture occurred at the first portion of the first edge of the touch-sensitive display.

255. 255. The method of claim 254, wherein the one or more status indicators displayed prior to detecting the first swipe gesture include at least a first status indicator and a second status indicator, and wherein modifying the position of the one or more status indicators includes adding display of at least a third status indicator to the one or more displayed status indicators.

256. 256. A method according to any one of claims 252 to 255, wherein the plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display comprises one or more controls responsive to input on the touch-sensitive display.

257. detecting a second swipe gesture in a respective direction from a second end of the touch-sensitive display, different from the first end of the touch-sensitive display; In response to detecting the second swipe gesture from the second end of the touch-sensitive display, displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application icons corresponding to a plurality of applications; 257. The method of any one of claims 252 to 256, further comprising:

258. detecting a second swipe gesture in a respective direction from a second end of the touch-sensitive display, different from the first end of the touch-sensitive display; displaying an application switcher user interface including a representation of a plurality of applications for selectively activating one of the applications represented in the application switcher user interface in response to detecting the second swipe gesture from the second end of the touch-sensitive display; 257. The method of any one of claims 252 to 256, further comprising:

259. detecting a second swipe gesture in a respective direction from a second end of the touch-sensitive display, different from the first end of the touch-sensitive display; in response to detecting the second swipe gesture from the second end of the touch-sensitive display, displaying an application switcher user interface including a representation of a plurality of applications for selectively activating one of the plurality of applications represented in the application switcher user interface in accordance with determining that the second swipe gesture satisfies an application switcher display criterion; and displaying a home screen user interface including a plurality of application start icons corresponding to a plurality of applications in accordance with determining that the second swipe gesture satisfies a home display criterion; 257. The method of any one of claims 252 to 256, further comprising:

260. 260. The method of any one of claims 256 to 259, wherein the second end of the touch-sensitive display on the electronic device is opposite the first end of the touch-sensitive display.

261. while displaying the plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display, the plurality of controls including a first control for adjusting a first setting of the touch-sensitive display but not a second control for adjusting a second setting of the touch-sensitive display; detecting a third swipe gesture in each direction across the plurality of controls for adjusting a setting of the touch-sensitive display; In response to detecting the third swipe gesture, ceasing to display the first control for adjusting the first setting of the touch-sensitive display within the plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display; and displaying a second control for adjusting the second setting of the touch-sensitive display within the plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display; 261. The method of any one of claims 252 to 260, further comprising:

262. a touch-sensitive display; one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising: Detecting a first swipe gesture in a respective direction from a first end of the touch-sensitive display; in response to detecting the first swipe gesture from the first end of the touch-sensitive display, displaying a plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display in accordance with determining that respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred at a first portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display; displaying a plurality of recently received notifications in accordance with determining that the respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred at a second portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display. An electronic device containing instructions.

263. 1. A computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs that, when executed by an electronic device having a touch-sensitive display, cause the device to: detecting a first swipe gesture in a respective direction from a first end of the touch-sensitive display; in response to detecting the first swipe gesture from the first end of the touch-sensitive display, displaying a plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display in accordance with determining that respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred at a first portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display; displaying a plurality of recently received notifications in accordance with determining that the respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred at a second portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display. A computer-readable storage medium containing instructions.

264. 1. A graphical user interface on an electronic device having a touch-sensitive display, a memory, and one or more processors executing one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising: Rendering from a first application; a first swipe gesture is detected in a respective direction from a first end of the touch-sensitive display; in response to detecting the first swipe gesture from the first end of the touch-sensitive display, displaying a plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display in accordance with determining that respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred at a first portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display; In accordance with determining that the respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred at a second portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display, a plurality of recently received notifications are displayed. Graphical user interface.

265. a touch-sensitive display; means for detecting a first swipe gesture in a respective direction from a first end of the touch-sensitive display; in response to detecting the first swipe gesture from the first end of the touch-sensitive display, displaying a plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display in accordance with determining that respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred at a first portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display; displaying a plurality of recently received notifications in accordance with determining that the respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred at a second portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display. Means and An electronic device comprising:

266. 1. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a touch-sensitive display, comprising: means for detecting a first swipe gesture in a respective direction from a first end of the touch-sensitive display; in response to detecting the first swipe gesture from the first end of the touch-sensitive display, displaying a plurality of controls for adjusting settings of the touch-sensitive display in accordance with determining that respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred at a first portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display; displaying a plurality of recently received notifications in accordance with determining that the respective portions of the first swipe gesture occurred at a second portion of the first end of the touch-sensitive display. Means and An information processing device comprising:

267. a touch-sensitive display; one or more processors; Memory and One or more programs; wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing any of the methods of claims 252 to 261.

268. 262. A computer-readable storage medium having stored thereon one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by an electronic device having a touch-sensitive display, cause the device to perform any of the methods of claims 252-261.

269. 262. A graphical user interface on an electronic device having a touch-sensitive display, a memory, and one or more processors executing one or more programs stored in the memory, the graphical user interface comprising a user interface displayed according to any of the methods of claims 252-261.

270. a touch-sensitive display; means for carrying out any of the methods of claims 252 to 261; An electronic device comprising:

271. 262. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a touch-sensitive display, the information processing apparatus comprising means for performing any of the methods of claims 252-261.

Images